Canon PC960 Specifications

REVISION 0
PC860
F13-8491
PC880
F13-8291
PC890
F13-8242
PC920
F13-8431
F13-8441
F13-8461
PC921
F13-8432
AUG. 1999
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
TYA00001-
PC940
F13-8436
TVD00001-
TZA00001-
PC941
F13-8437
TVE00001-
UAA00001-
PC950
F13-8231
F13-8241
TVB00001PUD00001PUE00001PUH00001-
PC960
F13-8434
TVG00001-
PC980
F13-8232
TVH00001-
PC981
F13-8233
TVJ00001-
TVF00001PUF00001PUG00001-
TVC00001-
FY8-13GA-000
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
IMPORTANT
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PUBLISHED BY CANON INC., JAPAN, TO SERVE AS A SOURCE
OF REFERENCE FOR WORK IN THE FIELD.
SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY VARY SLIGHTLY
FROM ACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER
PRINTED MATTER.
ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED
TO THE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE SALES COMPANY.
THIS DOCUMENTATION IS INTENDED FOR ALL SALES AREAS, AND MAY CONTAIN INFORMATION NOT APPLICABLE TO CERTAIN AREAS.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
Imprimé au Japon
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential
information.
Prepared by
OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION
CANON INC.
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
INTRODUCTION
This service manual has been prepared for the PC800/900 Series machines,
providing basic information used for servicing the machines in the field so as to ensure
their quality and performance.
This service manual consists of the following chapters:
Chapter 1
General Description introduces the machine's features, specifications,
names of parts, and how originals are reproduced.
Chapter 2
Basic Operation explains how copies are made on a step-by-step basis.
Chapter 3
Exposure System discusses the principles of operation used for the
machine's exposure system. It also explains the timing at which exposurerelated mechanisms are operated, and shows how they may be
disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
Chapter 4
Image Formation System discusses the principles of operation used for the
machine's image formation system. It also explains the timing at which image
formation-related mechanisms are operated, and shows how they may be
disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
Chapter 5
Pick-Up/Feeding System discusses the principles of operation used for the
machine's pickup/feeding system. It also explains the timing at which pickup/
feeding-related mechanisms are operated, and shows how they may be
disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
Chapter 6
Fixing System discusses the principles of operation used for the machine's
fixing system. It also explains the timing at which fixing-related mechanisms
are operated, and shows how they may be disassembled/assembled and
adjusted.
Chapter 7
Externals/Auxiliary Mechanisms discusses the principles of operation used
for the machine's externals/auxiliary mechanisms. It also explains the timing
at which auxiliary mechanism-related mechanisms are operated, and shows
how they may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
Chapter 8
ADF explains the principles of operation of the ADF in view of electrical and
mechanical functions and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows
how the unit may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
Chapter 9
Installation introduces requirements for the site of installation, and shows
how the machine may be installed using step-by-step instructions.
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Servicing provides tables of periodically replaced parts and
consumables/durables and scheduled servicing charts.
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting provides tables of maintenance/inspection, standards/
adjustments, and problem identification (image fault/malfunction).
Appendix contains a general timing chart and general circuit diagrams.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
i
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:
1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the
relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing
of operation.
represents the path of mechanical drive—where a signal name
In the diagrams,
accompanies the symbol
, the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal.
The expression “turn on the power” means flipping on the power switch, closing the
front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine
with power.
2. In the digital circuits, ‘1’ is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is
“High,” while ‘0’ is used to indicate “Low.” (The voltage value, however, differs from
circuit to circuit.)
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked
in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines
are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC
controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for
product improvement or other reasons, and major changes will be communicated in the
form of Service Information bulletins.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this
Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and
isolate faults in the machine.
ii
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
• This service manual covers the models shown in the following table. Be sure to have a
good understanding of the difference from model to model before referring to this
manual.
Model
Type
code
Multifeeder
Single
feeder
Zoom
Default Density
ratio correction
switch
(SW101)
PC860
PC880
PC890
PC920
PC920
PC920
PC920
PC921
PC940
PC941
PC950
PC950
PC950
PC960
PC980
PC981
TYA
TZA
UAA
PUD
PUE
PUH
TVB
TVC
TVD
TVE
PUF
PUG
TVF
TVG
TVH
TVJ
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
2R2E
2R2E
2R2E
2R2E
2R2E
2R2E
3R1E
3R1E
3R1E
3R1E
2R2E
2R2E
3R1E
3R1E
3R1E
3R1E
√
√
√
√
√
√
ADF
as
standard
√
√
√
√
√
√
Cassette
250 sheets
250 sheets
250 sheets
Universal
Universal
Universal
Universal
Universal
Universal
Universal
Universal
Universal
500 sheets
Universal
500 sheets
500 sheets
Copying
speed
(cpm) at
Direct
12
12
12
10
10
10
10
10
13
13
12
12
13
10
13
13
The notation “√” indicates that the item in question is available.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
iii
iv
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I.
II.
FEATURES ..................................1-1
SPECIFICATIONS .......................1-2
A. Copier ....................................1-2
B. ADF .......................................1-8
III. NAMES OF PARTS ................... 1-10
A. External View ..................... 1-10
B. Cross Section ..................... 1-13
IV. USING THE MACHINE .............
A. Control Panel......................
V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
BY THE USER ..........................
VI. IMAGE FORMATION ................
A. Outline ................................
1-15
1-15
1-17
1-20
1-20
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
I.
BASIC OPERATIONS ..................2-1
A. Functional Construction ........2-1
B. Outline of Electrical
Circuitry .................................2-2
C. Basic Sequence of
Operations .............................2-3
D. Controlling the Main Motor
(M1) .......................................2-5
E. Inputs to and Outputs from
the DC Controller ..................2-7
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
I.
II.
OPERATIONS ..............................3-1
A. Outline ...................................3-1
B. Varying the Reproduction
Ratio ......................................3-2
C. Lens Drive System ................3-3
D. Scanner Drive System ..........3-4
EXPOSURE SYSTEM .................3-9
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
A. Controlling the Scanning
Lamp .....................................3-9
III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 3-12
A. Scanner Drive Assembly .... 3-13
B. Lens Drive Assembly ......... 3-31
C. Exposure System ............... 3-37
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
v
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
I.
IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM ...4-1
A. Outline ...................................4-1
B. Timing Chart for the Image
Formation System .................4-3
C. Controlling the Primary
Charging Roller Bias .............4-4
D. Controlling the Transfer
Roller Bias .............................4-8
E. Controlling the Developing/
Separation Static Eliminator
Bias .................................... 4-11
F.
II.
Measuring the Density of
Originals ............................. 4-16
G. Controlling the Side Blanking
Mechanism ......................... 4-21
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 4-22
A. Cartridge ............................ 4-23
B. Transfer Charging
Assembly ............................ 4-25
C. Blank Exposure .................. 4-26
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
I.
II.
PICKUP/FEEDING SYSTEM.......5-1
A. Outline ...................................5-1
B. Controlling the Pickup
Roller .....................................5-3
C. Controlling the Movement of
Paper .....................................5-9
D. Detecting Jams .................. 5-12
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 5-18
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Pickup Assembly ................
Multifeeder Assembly .........
Single-feeder Assembly .....
Feeding Assembly ..............
Registration Roller
Assembly ............................
Delivery Assembly ..............
5-19
5-28
5-31
5-33
5-34
5-36
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
I.
vi
OPERATIONS ..............................6-1
A. Outline ...................................6-1
B. Controlling the Fixing
Temperature ..........................6-3
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
II.
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 6-10
A. Fixing Assembly ................. 6-11
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
I.
II.
FANS ............................................7-1
POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM .........7-3
A. Outline of the Power Supply
System ..................................7-3
B. Power Supply Circuit .............7-4
C. Detecting an Error on
the Composite Power Supply
PCB .......................................7-6
D. Protecting the Power Supply
Circuit ....................................7-6
III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ........7-7
A. External Covers .....................7-8
B. Control Panel...................... 7-15
C. Copyboard Glass ............... 7-16
D. Main Motor/Main Drive
Assembly ............................ 7-17
E. Electrical System ............... 7-21
CHAPTER 8 ADF
I.
ADF ..............................................8-1
A. Outline ...................................8-1
B Basic Construction ................8-2
C. Basic Operations ...................8-4
D. Detecting an Original ............8-6
E. Pickup Operation ...................8-8
F. Delivery .............................. 8-12
G. Controlling the Pickup
Motor .................................. 8-14
II.
H. Controlling the Belt Motor ..
I. Detecting Original Jams .....
J. Power Supply .....................
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .....
A. Removing the ADF .............
B. External Covers ..................
C. Drive System ......................
D. Feeding System .................
E. Electrical System ...............
8-15
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-21
8-23
8-26
8-33
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
I.
II.
SELECTING A SITE ....................9-1
UNPACKING AND
INSTALLATION ............................9-2
A. Unpacking and Installation ....9-2
B. Placing Copy Paper...............9-9
III. MOVING THE MACHINE .......... 9-12
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
I.
PERIODICALLY REPLACED
PARTS .......................................
II. DURABLES AND
CONSUMABLES ......................
III. SCHEDULED SERVICING .......
IV. STORING AND HANDLING
THE CARTRIDGE .....................
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
10-1
10-1
10-1
A. Storing the Cartridge with the
Packaging Seal Intact ........ 10-2
B. Storing and Handling the
Cartridge with the Packaging
Seal Removed .................... 10-3
10-2
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
vii
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
I.
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION ............................ 11-3
A. Image Adjustment Basic
Procedure ........................... 11-3
B. Points to Note for
Servicing ............................ 11-4
II. STANDARDS AND
ADJUSTMENTS ....................... 11-5
A. Mechanical ......................... 11-5
B. ADF .................................. 11-30
C. Electrical ........................... 11-41
III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE
FAULTS ................................... 11-48
A. Making Initial Checks ....... 11-48
B. Sample Image Faults ....... 11-52
C. Troubleshooting Image
Faults ................................ 11-53
IV. TROUBLESHOOTING
MALFUNCTIONS .................... 11-61
A. Troubleshooting
Malfunctions ..................... 11-61
V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING
PROBLEMS ............................ 11-75
A. Copy Paper Jam ............... 11-75
B. Faulty Feeding .................. 11-78
VI. ARRANGEMENT AND
FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL
PARTS ..................................... 11-79
A. Sensors and Solenoids .... 11-79
B. Switches ........................... 11-80
C. Lamp, Heater, Motor, Etc. 11-81
D. PCBs ................................ 11-82
E. ADF .................................. 11-83
F. Variable Resistors (VR) and
Check Pins by PCB .......... 11-84
VII. SELF DIAGNOSIS .................. 11-86
APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ........ A-1
B. SIGNALS AND
ABBREVIATIONS ....................... A-3
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................... A-5
D. DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................... A-7
E. ADF CONTROLLER CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-15
F. COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-19
G. CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-27
H. AE SENSOR CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-29
viii
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
SENSOR CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-30
NOISE FILTER CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-31
HIGH VOLTAGE CONTACT
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-32
BLANK EXPOSURE (front)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-33
BLANK EXPOSURE (rear)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-34
SPECIAL TOOLS ...................... A-35
SOLVENTS/OILS ...................... A-36
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This chapter provides specifications of the machine, instructions on how to operate
the machine, and an outline of copying process.
I.
II.
FEATURES ..................................1-1
SPECIFICATIONS .......................1-2
A. Copier ....................................1-2
B. ADF .......................................1-8
III. NAMES OF PARTS ................... 1-10
A. External View ..................... 1-10
B. Cross Section ..................... 1-13
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
IV. USING THE MACHINE .............
A. Control Panel......................
V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
BY THE USER ..........................
VI. IMAGE FORMATION ................
A. Outline ................................
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-15
1-15
1-17
1-20
1-20
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I.
FEATURES
1.
Personal Copier with a Zoom Function and a Fixed Copyboard
• You can choose either a default enlargement/reduction ratio or any ratio between 70% and
141% in 1% increments.
2.
Ecology-Conscious
• The use of a roller charging method has resulted in a considerable reduction of ozone: 0.01
ppm or less on the average, 0.02 ppm or less at maximum (1/100 to 1/1000 compared with
existing Canon machines).
3.
SURF Fixing Assembly
• The wait time is 0 sec (at 20°C room temperature), enabling speedy copying work immediately after power-on.
4.
Various Paper Sizes
• The paper may be between A4 (LGL) and A5 (STMT) (*Using the universal cassette).
• In manual feed mode, paper may be as large as A4 (LGL) or as small as a business card.
5.
All-in-One Cartridge for Simple Maintenance
• The photosensitive drum, toner case, charging roller, developing assembly, and cleaning assembly are constructed as a single entity (cartridge).
The user may expect quality copy images at all times as long as he/she performs simple
replacement/cleaning work.
6.
Large Paper Source
• The source of paper may contain as many as 550 sheets of paper (500-sheet cassette +
multifeeder; multifeeder type).
7.
Separate top unit
• The machine’s top unit may be opened to make jam removal easy.
8.
ADF Type
• Continuous copying is possible with the use of the ADF.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-1
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
II. SPECIFICATIONS
A.
1.
Copier
Type
Item
Descriptions
Body
Desk top
Copyboard
Fixed
Source of light
Halogen lamp (80 V/110 W for 120V-model; 150 V/160 W
for 220/240 V-model)
Lens
Fixed focal point lens
Photosensitive medium
OPC drum (24-mm dia.)
Table 1-201
2.
Mechanisms
Reproduction
Descriptions
Indirect static reproduction
Charging
Roller (direct charging)
Exposure
Slit (moving light source)
Copy density adjustment
Auto or manual
Development
Dry (toner projection)
Pickup
Cassette (1 pc.)
Single-feeder (single-feeder type)
Multifeeder (multifeeder type)
Separation
Curvature separation + static eliminator
Fixing
Flat heater
Cleaning
Blade
Original orientation
Center reference (copyboard)
Item
Table 1-202
1-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3.
Performance
Original type
Descriptions
Sheet, book, 3-D object (2kg max.)
Maximum original size
A4 (297 × 210 mm)/LGL (216 × 356 mm)
Reproduction ratio
Inch/AB-configuration: 2R2E Inch-configuration: 3R1E
Zoom
70% to 141% (in 1% increments*1)
Wait time
0 sec (at 20°C room temperature)
First copy time
10 sec or less (at 20°C room temperature; Direct, non-AE,
from the cassette)
Continuous copying
100 (max.)
Copy size
A4/LGL (297 × 210 mm/216 × 356 mm max.)
Business card (90 × 55 mm, min.)
Copy paper type
Cassette:
Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2), tracing paper (SM-1, A4R/
B5R), colored paper, recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2; A4R/
B5R), eco paper (80 g/m2; A4R)
Manual Feeder:
Plain paper (52 to 128 g/m2), tracing paper (SM-1, GNT80*2; A4R/B5R), transparency *2,*4 (A4R/LTRR*3), colored
paper, business card (200 g/m2 or less), label sheet*2 (A4R/
LTRR), recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2; A4R/B5R), eco paper (80 g/m2; A4R), postcard*3
Double-Sided/Overlay Copying*5:
Plain paper (64 to 128 g/m2), colored paper, business card
(200 g/m2 or less), recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2; A4R/
B5R), eco paper (80 g/m2; A4R), postcard*3
Cassette
With claws
Universal cassette (250 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper; A4/LGL to
A5/STMT)
250-sheet cassette (250 sheets of 80 g/m2)
500-sheet cassette (500 sheets of 80 g/m2)
Multifeeder tray
5 mm deep (approx.; 50 sheets of 80 g/m2)
Copy tray
100 sheets (A4; 80 g/m2)
Non-image width
Leading edge: 2.0 ±1.5 mm (Direct; 4.0 mm or less otherwise)
Left/right: 0.0 +2.0, -0.0 mm (0 +4.0, -0.0 mm for LTR)
Auto power-off
Provided (5 min, approx.; fixed)*6
Item
Table 1-203
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-3
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.
*6.
1-4
Applies only to models with a zoom function.
Applies only to single pickup if the multifeeder is used.
Applies only to vertical feeding.
Upon delivery, be sure to remove each from the copy tray.
Be sure to remove any curling before feeding for a second time.
If stopped because paper ran out during copying operation, 1 hr.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
4.
Others
Descriptions
Item
Operating condition
Temperature
Humidity
Atmospheric pressure
7.5°C to 32.5°C/44.5°F to 90.5°F
5% to 85% RH
607.95 to 1013.25 hPa (0.6 to 1 atm)
Power source
120 V 60 Hz 220/240 V 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Serial number
TVBxxxxx
TVCxxxxx
TVDxxxxx
TVExxxxx
TVFxxxxx
TVGxxxxx
TVHxxxxx
TVJxxxxx
Maximum power consumption
0.9 kW or less
Standby: 1.2W (approx.; about 5min; reference only)
Copying: 0.4kWh (approx.; reference only)
Noise
Standby: -(sound power level by ISO)
Copying: (sound power level by ISO)
• Single-feeder type: 68 dB or less
• Multifeeder type: 66 dB or less
Ozone
0.01 ppm or less (average; 0.02 ppm or less, max.)
Dimensions (WxDxH)
Copyboard Type
484.9 × 448.2 × 297.5 mm*1/ 329.0 mm*2
19.1 in. × 17.6 in × 11.7 in*1/ 13.0 in*2
ADF Type
484.9 × 448.2 × 358.3 mm*1/ 389.8 mm*2
19.1 in × 17.6 in × 14.1 in*1/ 15.3 in*2
Weight (including the cassette)
Copyboard Type
Single-feeder type:
Multifeeder type:
ADF Type
Single-feeder type:
Multifeeder type:
Consumables
PUDxxxxx
PUExxxxx
PUFxxxxx
PUGxxxxx
TYAxxxxx
TZAxxxxx
UAAxxxxx
PUHxxxxx
19.3 kg*1/ 42.5 lb*1, 20.9 kg*2/ 46.0 lb*2
19.5 kg*1/ 42.9 lb*1, 21.1 kg*2/ 46.4 lb*2
23.8 kg*1/ 52.4 lb*1, 25.2 kg*2/ 55.4 lb*2
24.0 kg*1/ 52.8 lb*1, 25.4 kg*2/ 55.9 lb*2
Copy paper: Keep wrapped, and protect against humidity.
Toner: Avoid direct sunlight, and store at 40°C/104°F, 85%
or less.
Table 1-204
*1.
*2.
250-sheet cassette type
500-sheet cassette type
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-5
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
5.
Default Ratios
Item
Direct
2R2E (Inch/AB-configuration)
1:1.000
3R1E (Inch-configuration)
1:1.000
1:0.707
1:0.707
Reduce I
1:0.786
Reduce II
1:0816
Reduce III
1:0.860
Reduce IV
Enlarge I
1:1.154
Enlarge II
1:1.414
1:1.414
Table 1-205
1-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
6.
Copying Speed
Copying speed
at Direct
Reproduction ratio
Copy size
13
Direct
12
Reduce I (70.7%)
Reduce II (78.6%)
Reduce IV (86.0%)
Enlarge II (141.4%)
Direct
10
Reduce I (70.7%)
Reduce III (81.6%)
Enlarge I (115.4%)
Enlarge II (141.4%)
Direct
10
Reduce I (70.7%)
Reduce III (81.6%)
Enlarge I (115.4%)
Enlarge II (141.4%)
Direct
LTRR
LGL
STMTR
MIN
LGL → LTRR
MARJIN
MAX
A4R
B5R
A5R
A4R → A5R
B5R → A5R
B5R → A4R
A5R→ A4R
A4R
B5R
A5R
A4R → A5R
B5R → A5R
B5R → A4R
A5R → A4R
LTRR
LGL
STMTR
MIN
LGL → LTRR
MARJIN
MAX
Reduce I (70.7%)
Reduce II (78.6%)
Reduce III (86.0%)
Enlarge II (141.4%)
Number of copies
( Multifeeder*1)
(Copies / min)
13 (9)
11 (8)
13 (9)
13 (9)
13 (9)
13 (9)
10 (9)
12 (9)
12 (9)
12 (9)
12 (9)
12 (9)
12 (9)
10 (9)
10 (9)
10 (9)
10 (9)
10 (9)
10 (9)
10 (9)
10 m(9)
10 (9)
9
10 (9)
10 (9)
10 (9)
10 (9)
9
Table 1-206
*1.
The number of copies starting with the pickup operation that follows the delivery of the
19th copy in a continuous copying job. (See p.5-8)
The specifications are subject to change for product improvement.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-7
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
B.
ADF
Descriptions
Item
Original pickup
Auto pickup/delivery
Original orientation
Face-down
Original position
Center reference
Original separation
Top separation
Original type
Single-sided (50 to 128 g/m2)
A5 (STMT) to A4R (LTRR), LGL
Length: 139.7 to 355.6 mm (feeding direction)
Width: 139.7 to 215.9 mm
Stack
30 sheets (80 g/m2 or less; about 3 mm in height)
Original processing mode
Single-sided original to single-sided copy
Original size detection
Yes (in feeding direction)
Mixed original sizes
No
Original detection
Yes
Original feeding speed
446 mm/sec
Communication with host
IPC
Dimensions
Width: 474 mm/ 18.7 in.
(659 mm/ 25.9 in. with the tray open)
Depth: 394 mm/ 15.5 in.
Height: 74 mm/ 2.9 in. (216 mm/ 8.5 in. with the tray open)
Weight
5 kg/ 11 lb (approx.)
Power source
24 VDC and 5 VDC (from the host)
Maximum power consumption
40 W or less
Operating environment
Temperature: same as the host
Humidity:
same as the host
Table 1-207
1-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
*1.
The following may not be used as an original:
• Sheet with a staple, clip, or glue.
• Sheet with a cut, hole, or tear.
• Sheet with holes for binding.
• Sheet with a carbon back.
• Sheet with a cut-and-paste piece.
• Sheet with curling, bending, or wrinkling.
The specifications are subject to change for product improvement.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-9
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
III. NAMES OF PARTS
A.
1.
External View
[1]
Copyboard Type
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1] Copyboard cover
[2] Static eliminator cleaner
[3] Manual feed tray
[4] Right door
[5] Cassette
[6] Copyboard glass
Figure 1-301
[4]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[6]
[1] Copy tray
[2] Power cord connector
[3] Open/close lever
[4] Static eliminator
[5] Copy density correction switch
[6] Delivery guide plate
Figure 1-302
1-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.
ADF Type
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[1] ADF
[2] Manual feed tray
[3] Right door
[3]
[4] Cassette
[5] Copyboard glass
Figure 1-303
[6]
[5]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Static eliminator cleaner
Delivery guide plate
Copy tray
Power cord connector
[5] Open/close lever
[6] Static eliminator
[7] Copy density correction switch
Figure 1-304
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-11
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3.
ADF
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[1] Original tray
[2] Original delivery tray
[3] Slide guide
[4] Auxiliary tray
Figure 1-305
1-12
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
B.
1.
Cross Section
Body
[1]
[2] [3] [4]
[5]
[6]
[28] [27] [26] [25] [24]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[7]
[8]
[23] [22]
No. 3 mirror
No. 2 mirror
No. 1 mirror
Scanning lamp
Heat exhaust fan
Copyboard glass
Side blanking lamp
Lens
Primary charging roller
No. 6 mirror
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13]
[21]
[14]
[20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [15]
Cartridge
No. 4 mirror
No. 5 mirror
Multifeeder tray
Vertical path roller
Multifeeder pickup roller
Cassette pickup roller
Registration roller
Developing cylinder
Photosensitive drum
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[29]
Transfer roller
Feed belt
Cassette
Fixing upper unit
Fixing lower roller
Cleaning roller
Delivery roller
Copy tray
Single-feeder pickup roller
Figure 1-306
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-13
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2.
ADF
[1]
[2]
[13]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[3]
[12]
[11]
[10] [9]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
Delivery roller
Copy tray
Pickup roller 2
Pickup roller 1
Copyboard tray
Auxiliary tray
Guide plate
[4]
[5]
[6]
[8] [7]
Separation pad
Registration roller
Feed belt drive roller
Feed belt
Feed belt roller
Feed belt link slave roller
Figure 1-307
1-14
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
IV. USING THE MACHINE
A.
Control Panel
[1]
[2]
[15]
[3]
[14]
[4]
[5]
[13]
[6]
[12] [11]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
Figure 1-401
No.
1
Name
Copy density adjusting lever
Description
Adjusts the density of copies
manually.
2
Copy density mode indicator
Indicates the selected copy density mode.
3
Default ratio indicator
Indicates the selected default ratio.
4
Paper selection indicator*1
Indicates the selected cassette/
manual feed tray.If there is no
paper loaded, it flashes.
5
Jam indicator
Flashes in response to a jam.
6
Count/ratio indicator
• Indicates the number of copies
or reproduction ratio.
• The symbol “%” turns on
when indicating a ratio.
100 (max.; continuous
copying)
7
Clear/stop key
Stops copying or returns copying mode to standard mode.
Standard Mode
Ratio: 100%
Count: 1
Paper source: cassette
Copy density: auto
mode
8
Copy start key
Starts copying.
9
Power switch
Turns on and off the power.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Remarks
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-15
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
No.
10
Name
Count/zoom set key
Description
Sets the number of copies or a
zoom ratio.
11
Zoom indicator*2
Turns on when zoom mode is
selected.
12
Zoom key*2
Selects/deselects zoom mode.
13
Paper selection key*1
Selects the cassette/ manual
feed tray.
14
Default ratio key
Selects a default reproduction
ratio.
15
Copy density mode selection
key
Selects copying density mode.
Remarks
May be between 70%
and 141% in 1% increments.
Table 1-401
*1.
*2.
1-16
Applies only to a multifeeder model.
Applies only to a model equipped with a zoom function.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE USER
Instruct the user to clean the following if images tend to be soiled or copy paper tends to jam
often.
1. Soiled Images
a. Copyboard Glass/Copyboard Cover
Clean the cover with a moist cloth (with water or mild detergent solution); then, dry wipe it.
b. Feeding Belt (ADF type)
b.1 Cleaning in Feeder Cleaning Mode
1) Turn on the machine, and hold down the Copy Density Mode Selection key for 4 sec or
more.
• The count/ratio indicator will indicate ‘U6’.
Zoom
Figure 1-501
2) Place about 10 sheets of blank copy paper (A4/LTR) on the original tray of the ADF.
3) Press the Copy Start key.
• Copy paper will be fed from the original tray.
• The indicator flashes ‘U6’ while the feeder is being cleaned.
4) Press the Copy Density Mode Selection key to end the mode.
Caution:
• You cannot start feeder cleaning mode while the machine is making copies or if an error
exists.
• The auto power-off mechanism does not operate while feeder cleaning mode is being
executed.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-17
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
b.2 Cleaning by Hand
1) Wipe the feed belt with a moist cloth (water or mild detergent solution) in the direction of
the arrow in the figure; then, dry wipe it.
Figure 1-502
2. If Jams Occur Frequently
a. Static Eliminator
1) Remove the static eliminator cleaner from the machine.
Figure 1-503 (Copyboard type)
1-18
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Figure 1-504 (ADF type)
2) Pull the open/close lever to open the machine.
3) Using the static eliminator cleaner, clean the static eliminator.
• Brush out the paper lint or the like from the groove of the static eliminator.
Figure 1-505
4) Close the machine as soon as you have finished cleaning. (Work briskly.)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-19
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
VI. IMAGE FORMATION
A.
Outline
The construction of the machine is as follows:
Copyboard glass
Scanning lamp
Fixed focal point lens
Side blanking lamp
(front, rear)
Primary charging roller
Developing blade
Cleaning blade
Developing cylinder
Fixing assembly
Photosensitive drum
Transfer charging roller
Static eliminator
Figure 1-601
1-20
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The machine’s image formation process consists of the following seven steps:
Step 1
Primary charging (AC + negative DC)
Step 2
Image exposure
Step 3
Development (AC + negative DC)
Step 4
Transfer (negative DC)
Step 5
Separation (curvature separation + static eliminator; positive DC)
Step 6
Fixing
Step 7
Drum cleaning
Static latent image formation block
1. Primary charging
7. Drum cleaning
2. Image exposure
3. Development
Manual feed
4. Transfer
Delivery
6. Fixing
5. Separation
Registration
Cassette
: Flow of copy paper
: Rotation of the photosensitive drum
Figure 1-602
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
1-21
CHAPTER 2
BASIC OPERATION
This chapter provides descriptions on basic operations, functions of each operation,
relationships between electrical and mechanical systems, and timing at which each
associated part is turned on.
Process speed
I.
BASIC OPERATIONS ..................2-1
A. Functional Construction ........2-1
B. Outline of Electrical
Circuitry .................................2-2
C. Basic Sequence of
Operations .............................2-3
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
96 mm/sec
D. Controlling the Main Motor
(M1) .......................................2-5
E. Inputs to and Outputs from
the DC Controller ..................2-7
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
I. BASIC OPERATIONS
A.
Functional Construction
The machine consists of four functional blocks: pickup/feeding system, exposure system, image formation system, and control system.
Control system
Exposure system
Control panel
Copyboard
Original
illuminating block
Control circuit
Optical block
Image formation
system
Primary charging
roller
Drum
cleaning block
Photosensitive
drum
Transfer/
separation
Feeding
Developing
assembly
lock
ed b
Pickup
control block
l fe
nua
Ma
Copy tray
Fixing assembly/
delivery assembly
Cassette
Pickup/
feeding system
Figure 2-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-1
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
B.
Outline of Electrical Circuitry
The machine’s major electric mechanisms are controlled by the microprocessor mounted on
the DC controller PCB, which reads input signals from sensors and operating keys according to the
instructions of the program stored in advance and sends signals used to drive motors, solenoids,
lamps, and other loads as needed.
<Sensor Block>
<Control Block>
DC controller PCB
Sensor
• Scanner home position detection
• Lens home position detection
• Pre-registration roller paper
detection
• Delivery paper detection
• Vertical path roller paper detection
• Single-feeder paper detection
Q101
CPU
+5V
+24V
<Loads>
Composite
power supply PCB
Scanning lamp
Q900
CPU
Fixing heater
Highvoltage
circuit
block
Contact
PCB
• Primary charging roller
• Developing cylinder
• Transfer charging roller
• Static eliminator
AE sensor
PCB
Main motor
driver PCB
Main
motor
Thermistor
• Scanner thermistor
• Fixing thermistor
Solenoid
Control
panel
• Pickup clutch solenoid
• Registration clutch solenoid
• Lens solenoid
• Multifeeder pickup solenoid
• Cassette pickup solenoid
Side blanking
lamp
Scanner/
lens drive motor
Power
switch
Sensor/
switch
Scanner cooling fan
ADF
ADF load
Figure 2-102
2-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
C.
Basic Sequence of Operations
• A4R, Direct, 2 Copies, Continuous, Cassette
Power switch
ON
Copy Start key
ON
STBY INTR AER
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV LSTR STBY
0.3sec (approx.)
Main motor (M1)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
Scanner
I II
Forward
I
Reverse
Primary AC bias
Primary DC bias
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Transfer bias
Static eliminator bias
Fixing heater (H1)
I : Scanner home position detection
II : Lens home position detection
Figure 2-103
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-3
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
Period
• From when he power switch is turned
on to when the Copy Start key is
pressed.
• From when LSTR ends to when the
Copy Start key is pressed.
Description
Waits until the Copy Start key is
pressed.
INTR
(initial rotation)
From when the Copy Start key is
pressed to when the scanner moves forward.
Removes residual charges from the
photosensitive drum, thereby ensuring
a stable drum sensitivity.
AER
(AE rotation)
While the scanner moves forward about
10 cm and then moves it in reverse.
Measures the density of the original.
SCFW
(scanner forward)
While the scanner is moving forward.
• The distance varies according to the
selected copy size and reproduction
ratio.
• The forward speed varies according to
the selected reproduction ratio.
Illuminates the original by the scanning
lamp, and the reflected optical image is
projected to the photosensitive drum
through mirrors and lenses.
SCRV
(scanner reverse)
While the scanner is moving in reverse.
• The reverse speed is about 3.3 as fast
as the forward speed used in Direct.
Moves the scanner to the home position
in preparation for the next copying run.
LSTR
(last rotation)
From when SCRV ends to when the
main motor stops.
STBY
(standby)
Neutralizes the drum surface potential
as post-processing.
Table 2-101
2-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
D.
Controlling the Main Motor (M1)
1.
Outline
Table 2-102 shows the functions of the main motor control circuit, and Figure 2-104 is a block
diagram of the circuit.
Item
Power supply
Description
24 VDC from the composite power supply.
Drive signal
Signal (MMD) from the DC controller PCB.
Moving/drive parts
Photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, developing assembly,
transfer charging roller, pickup roller, vertical roller, registration roller,
feeding assembly, fixing assembly, delivery roller, heat exhaust fan
Control
Executes on/off control.
Executes constant speed rotation control.
Error detection
Issues ‘E010’.
Table 2-102
+24V
DC
controller
PCB
J205
-4
24V
J901
-1
-3
GND
-2
J103 J203
-3
-6
-2
MMD
-3
J104 J204
-1
-7
-1
Clock pulse
generator
Phase
control
drive
circuit
Drive
current
Main motor
(M1)
Hall IC output
MLOCK -4
MMCLK
Composite
power
supply
PCB
Reference signal
Main motor drive PCB
Figure 2-104
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-5
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
2.
Operations
The main motor (M1) is a DC motor with a built-in clock pulse generator, which generates
clock pulses (MMCLK) in relation to the rotation of the motor while the motor is rotating.
The speed control circuit controls the main motor (M1) so that it rotates at a specific speed by
matching the frequency of these clock pulses and that of the reference signals.
When the main motor drive signal (MMD) from the DC controller circuit goes ‘1’, the motor
diver drive circuit turns on, causing the main motor (M1) to rotate at a specific speed.
While the main motor is rotating at a specific speed, the main motor driver PCB keeps sending
the constant speed state signal (MLOCK=0) to the DC controller PCB. If the rotation of the motor
starts to have fluctuations, the MLOCK signal goes ‘1’.
Related Error Code
E010
While the main motor drive signal is generated, the rotation of the main motor deviates from
a specific number for 1 sec or more.
a. Turning On/Off the Main Motor
When the main motor drive signal (MMD) from the DC controller circuit goes ‘1’, the main motor
driver turns on to rotate the main motor (M1).
b. Rotating the Main Motor at a Constant Speed
The drive circuit on the motor driver PCB controls the main motor so that the phase of the frequency of the clock pulse signals (MMCLK) occurring when the motor rotates and that of the
frequency of the reference signals match. The main motor driver PCB sends the constant speed
state signal (MLOCK=0) to the DC controller circuit.
c. Detecting an Error (E010)
If the rotation of the main motor starts to have fluctuations for some reason, the MLOCK signal
goes ‘1’. If the signal remains ‘1’ for about 1 sec, the DC controller will find the condition to be a
fault in the main motor, and will stop the main motor and, at the same time, indicate ‘E010’ in the
display.
2-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
E.
1.
Inputs to and Outputs from the DC Controller
Inputs to the DC Control (1/2)
DC controller PCB
Scanner home
position sensor
+5V
J101-1
-3 SCHP
-2
PS1
Lens home
position sensor
PS2
+5V
J109-11
-10 LHP
-9
PS3
J62 J102-7
DIG3
-9 DPD
-8
When PS3 has detected paper, ‘0’.
(The light-blocking plate is at PS3, ‘1’.)
PS4
+5V
J132-3
-5
PDP
-4
When PS4 has detected paper, ‘1’.
(The light-blocking plate is at PS4, ‘1’.)
PS5
J113-1
DIG2
-3
SFPD
-2
When PS5 has detected paper, ‘0’.
(The light-blocking plate is at PS5, ‘1’.)
Q751
+5V
J108-4
-3
RPD
-5
When Q751 has detected paper, ‘1’.
(The light-blocking plate is at PS751, ‘0’.)
Delivery sensor
Vertical path roller
paper sensor
Single-feeder
paper sensor
(Single-feeder type only)
Pre-registration
roller paper sensor
When the scanner is in the home position, ‘1’.
(The light-blocking plate is at PS1, ‘1’.)
When the lens is in the home position, ‘1’.
(The light-blocking plate is at PS2, ‘1’.)
Sensor PCB
TH1 J433 J62 J102-1
Fixing thermistor
TH1
When the surface temperature of the fixing
heater increases, the voltage decreases.
(analog signal)
TH2
When the temperature of the scanner increases,
the voltage decreases. (analog signal)
-6
TH2
Scanner thermistor
J131-1
-2
Figure 2-105
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-7
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
2.
Inputs to the DC Controller (2/2)
DC controller PCB
J601
+24V
AE sensor PCB
+24V
J107-4
-3
AE
-2 AEREF
-1
When the light reflected by the original increases,
the voltage increases.
The keys and the LEDs are wired in a matrix
in the control panel PCB, and the DC controller
turns on or flashes the LEDs and reads key inputs.
J301 J111
Control panel
PCB
J111-15
PWOFF
J111-16
SW309
J62
J102-2
-3
-4
-5
DIG1
HEAT0
DIG1
HEAT1
The variation in the resistance of the fixing heater
is corrected in three levels based on combinations
of 2-bit signals.
Figure 2-106
2-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
3.
Outputs from the DC Controller (1/2)
Composite power supply PCB
Line filter
J201-2
LF1
(220/240V model only)
DS1
NF1
-1
Noise filter
Door switch
Fixing heater J16
H1
J434
Transformer
J207-1
FU2
-2
Fixing heater
activation circuit
Thermal fuse 2
Scanning lamp
FU1
DC controller PCB
J104-2
HEAT_TRG When ‘0’,
the fixing heater
turns on.
J910-3
LA1
-1
Scanning lamp
activation circuit
Thermal fuse 1
Primary charging roller
Developing cylinder
Transfer charging roller
Static eliminator
Highvoltage
circuit
block
Microprocessor
Communication with
the composite power
supply
HVT board
+24V
J103-6
MMD
J104-1
MLOCK
M1
Main
motor
See p. 2-5.
Main motor
driver PCB
See p. 3-7.
M2
Scanner/
lens drive motor
Figure 2-107
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-9
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
4.
Outputs from the DC Control PCB (2/2)
DC controller PCB
J53 J51
SL1
Pickup clutch solenoid
+24V
SL2
-5
SL3
SL4
Cassette pickup solenoid
+24V
SL5
When ‘0’, the lens solenoid turns on.
LNSLD*
+24V
J109-8
-7
J58
RGSLD*
When ‘0’, the registration clutch
solenoid turns on.
J109-2
-1
J55 J51
Multifeeder pickup solenoid
(Multifeeder type only)
PUSLD*
When ‘0’, the pickup clutch solenoid
turns on.
J109-6
J52
Lens solenoid
J109-4
-3
J54
Registration clutch solenoid
+24V
MFSLD*
When ‘0’, the multifeeder pickup
solenoid turns on.
+24V
J132-2
-1
CPUSD*
When ‘0’, the cassette pickup solenoid
turns on.
+24V
J130-1
Scanner cooling fan
FM1
-2
J106-1
FM1D*
When ‘0’, the scanner cooling fan
turns on.
SB_LP*
Side blanking lamp (rear)
When ‘0’, the blanking lamp turns on.
+24V
Side blanking lamp (front)
-2
Figure 2-108
2-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION
5.
Inputs to and Outputs from the ADF
DC controller PCB
J60
To the ADF
J24
To the ADF
-8
J114-1
-7
-2
-6
-3
-5
-4
-4
-5
-3
-6
-2
-7
-1
-8
REQ
ACK
TXD
See Chapter 8.
RXD
-4
-3
-2
-1
J202-1
J105-6
+24V
-2
-5
+5V
-3
-4
+5V
-4
-3
-5
-2
-6
-1
+24V
Composite power supply PCB
Figure 2-109
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
2-11
CHAPTER 3
EXPOSURE SYSTEM
This chapter discusses the principles of operation used for the machine's lens drive
unit and scanner drive unit. It also explains the timing at which these drive units are
operated, and shows how they may be disassembled/assmbled and adjusted.
I.
II.
OPERATIONS ..............................3-1
A. Outline ...................................3-1
B. Varying the Reproduction
Ratio ......................................3-2
C. Lens Drive System ................3-3
D. Scanner Drive System ..........3-4
EXPOSURE SYSTEM .................3-9
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
A. Controlling the Scanning
Lamp .....................................3-9
III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 3-12
A. Scanner Drive Assembly .... 3-13
B. Lens Drive Assembly ......... 3-31
C. Exposure System ............... 3-37
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
I.
OPERATIONS
A.
Outline
Table 3-101 shows the major functions of the exposure system.
Item
Description
Lamp
Halogen
Scanning
By moving the No. 1 mirror mount
Scanner position detection
By a sensor (scanner home position sensor; PS1)
Ratio variation
Main scanning direction:by varying the optical length
Sub scanning direction:by varying the speed of the No. 1 mirror mount
Lens drive control
Scanner/lens drive motor (M2)
Fixed focal point lens unit
Mobile No. 4/5 mirror unit
Scanner drive control
Scanner/lens drive motor (M2)
Scanner thermistor (TH2)
Protective function
By a fuse (blows in response to overheating of the scanning lamp to cut
power to the lamp)
• Thermal fuse (FU1; blows at 128°C)
Table 3-101
Copyboard glass
Enlarge Reduce
Moves for enlargement/
reduction
Fixed focal point lens
No. 4/5 mirror unit
Photosensitive
drum
Figure 3-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-1
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
B.
Varying the Reproduction Ratio
The reproduction ratio in the drum axial direction (main scanning direction) is varied by the
lens drive system, and that in the drum peripheral direction (sub scanning direction) is changed by
the scanner drive system.
In the lens drive system, the positions of the fixed focal point lens and the No. 4/5 mirror are
changed to vary the reproduction ratio.
In the scanner system, the relative speed of the No. 1 mirror mount is made higher (for reduction) or lower (for enlargement) than the drum peripheral speed.
F'
Direct
F
Optical length
L1
F'
Reduction
F
Optical length
L2
F'
Enlargement
F
Optical length
L3
Optical length: L1 < L2, L1 < L3
Figure 3-102
3-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
C.
Lens Drive System
1.
Outline
The lens drive system is driven by the scanner/lens drive motor (M2). When the lens solenoid
(SL3) turns on, the switching gear is pushed in the direction of . In this condition, when the
scanner/lens drive motor rotates in reverse direction ( ), the lens unit will move in the direction of
reduction ( ) by the work of the gear and the lens cable.
At the same time, the No. 4/5 mirror unit operates according to the distance over which the lens
unit is moved by the work of the gear and the cam, thereby varying the optical length.
At this time, the blanking lamp also moves in conjunction with the lens to blank out the appropriate front/rear widths to suit the selected reduction ratio.
SL3
ON
SL3
OFF
Switching
gear
Switching
gear
While the scanner is moving
Top View
While the lens is moving
Cam
Switching gear
Scanner/lens drive motor
(M2)
SL3
Lens cable
Lens home position detection
signal(LHP)
Lens solenoid drive signal(LNSLD*)
No. 4/5 mirror unit
Reduction
Enlargement
Lens home position
sensor (PS2)
Lens unit
Lens shift detecting shaft
for side blanking lamp
DC controller PCB
Figure 3-103
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-3
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
D.
Scanner Drive System
1.
Outline
The scanner is driven by the scanner/lens drive motor (M2), whose direction of rotation
changes to move the scanner forward or in reverse.
When moving the scanner forward, the speed of rotation of the motor varies according to the
selected reproduction ratio on a continuous basis; when moving the scanner in reverse, on the other
hand, its speed remains the same regardless of the selected reproduction ratio in normal copying
(312mm/sec, about 3.3 as fast as when moving the scanner forward in Direct).
The distance over which the scanner is moved varies according to the length of copy paper and
the selected reproduction ratio.
The scanner/lens drive motor dives the lens drive system as well as the scanner.
M2
J110-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
Scanner home position sensor (PS1)
J101-1
Scanner home position signal (SCHP)
SC_COM
SC_B*
SC_B
SC_COM
SC_A*
SC_A
PS1 Light-blocking
plate
Q109
Motor driver circuit
DC controller PCB
Figure 3-104
3-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
2.
Relationship between Scanner Sensor and Signal
Scanner sensor
PS1(scanner
home position
sensor)
Scanner
Forward
Reverse
Signal
Description
• Provides a means of reference for
determining forward movement
distance.
• Stops the scanner moving in reverse in 0.1 sec.
SCHP
Table 3-102
3.
Basic Sequence of Operations (scanner)
Power switch Copy Start key
ON
ON
STBY
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
I
Forward
Reverse
SCFW
SCRV LSTR STBY
Scanner home position
sensor (PS1)
Pre-registration roller
paper sensor (Q751)
Scanner
I
II
Scanning lamp(LA1)
I : Scanner home position detection
II : Lens home position detection
Figure 3-105
The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB controls the forward movement distance of the
scanner with reference to the falling edge of the scanner home position signal. The forward movement distance of the scanner varies according to the length of copy paper and reproduction ratio. If
the ratio is less than 130%, the scanner is moved forward as if for A4 (297 mm); if it is 130% or
more, the scanner is moved forward as if for LTR (279 mm).
For descriptions on how length is detected, see p. 5-10.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-5
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
4.
Controlling the Copying Speed
The machine uses a halogen lamp for scanning, and the heat of the lamp increases the temperature of the copyboard.
To prevent possible overheating of the copyboard glass, the temperature of the scanner is
monitored by a thermistor (TH2); if its reading reaches 37.5°C or higher, the copying speed is
reduced to 6 cpm.
If this mechanism turns on during continuous copying, it remains on until the end of the copying job.
At the end of copying, if the reading of the thermistor is 34.5°C or higher, the No. 1 mirror
mount is moved forward 105 mm from the home position and stopped, thereby lowering the temperature of the copyboard fast.
Reference:
While the copying speed is controlled to 6 cpm, the speed of the reverse movement of the
scanner is reduced to prevent overheating of the copyboard glass. (about 75 mm/sec)
,,,
Switching to 6-cpm copying speed
SCRV
Check timing by thermistor
(TH2)
Main motor (M1)
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
37.5˚C or higher
Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)
Registration clutch
solenoid (SL2)
Scanner
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV LSTR STBY
34.5˚C or higher
I
II
I : When the pre-registration roller paper sensor (Q751) is off, the pickup clutch solenoid is
turned off to prevent overheating of the pickup clutch solenoid (SL1).
II : By the time the Copy Start key is pressed or the power switch is turned off and then on again
next time, the scanner is moved to and stopped at 105 mm forward from the home position.
Figure 3-106
3-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
5.
a.
Controlling the Scanner/Lens Drive Motor
Outline
The scanner/lens drive motor (M2) is a 4-phase stepping motor. The timing at which the drive
power (SC-COM) and pulses (SC-A, SCA*, SC-B, SC-B*) are generated is controlled to turn on/
off the scanner/lens drive motor (M2) or to switch the direction of its rotation.
DC controller PCB
+24VU
R399
J110
SC-COM
(Q101)
SC-COM
(Q109)
Microprocessor
A
A*
SC-A
B
SC-A*
B*
Motor
driver
circuit
SC-B
SC-B*
M2
Current switching signal 1
Current switching signal 2
Current switching signal 3
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-7
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
b.
Operations
The microprocessor (Q101) mounted on the DC controller PCB receives instructions from the
control panel PCB copying mode settings (e.g., reproduction ratio). In response, it applies drive
pulses to the scanner/lens drive motor (M2) through the motor driver circuit.
The scanner motor is a 4-phase stepping motor, and changes the direction and speed of its
rotation according to the sequence and frequency of drive pulses (SC-A*through SC-B*).
The motor drive voltage is switched on and off by pulse signals (A through B*) generated by
the microprocessor (Q101). Any of these pulse signals is generated when the motor is in operation,
while no pulse signal is generated when the motor is at rest.
The current switching signals from 1 to 3 generated by the microprocessor (Q101) are used to
control the current flowing to the motor so that it varies according to the state of the scanner and the
lens.
0
Reversing the
scanner
0
Forwarding the
scanner
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
Starting the lens
Moving the lens
Current switching signal 1
0
Current switching signal 2
Current switching signal 3
c.
Detecting Overcurrent for the Scanner/Lens Drive Motor
If overcurrent flows to the scanner/lens drive motor for some reason, the fuse (R339) on the DC
controller PCB will blow to cut the power to the motor.
Caution:
The fuse (R339) will not recover once it has blown.
3-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
II. EXPOSURE SYSTEM
A.
Controlling the Scanning Lamp
1.
Outline
Figure 3-201 shows the circuit used to control the scanning lamp, and has the following functions:
• Turning on/off the scanning lamp.
• Controlling the intensity of the scanning lamp.
• Monitoring the state (on/off) of the scanning lamp.
(Q101)
(Q900)
Intensity adjustment
signal
PWM_1KHz
9
4
Phase
2
control
circuit
Microprocessor
Serial
communication
Microprocessor
Rectifying
circuit
Lamp activation
signal
+
+
-
Thermal fuse
(FU1)
Scanning lamp
(LA1)
7
LAMP_ON
(HIC001)
Arcing circuit
Activation detection
signal
Rectifying
circuit
LAMP_DETECT
Activation detection circuit
VR107
DC controller PCB
Composite power supply PCB
Figure 3-201
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-9
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
2.
a.
Operations
Turning On/Off the Scanning Lamp
The DC controller PCB and the composite power supply exchange signals in serial communication to control the scanning lamp. According to the scanner lamp active voltage signal, the microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB controls the intensity adjustment signal
(PWM_1KHz) and the lamp activation signal (LAMP_ON) to turn on/off the scanning lamp
(LA1).
When LAMP_ON is ‘0’,
The phase control circuit turns on.
The arcing circuit turns on.
The scanning lamp turns on.
When LAMP_ON is ‘1’,
The phase control circuit turns off.
The arcing circuit turns off.
The scanning lamp turns off.
3-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
b.
Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp
The intensity of the lamp is controlled by the scanning lamp active voltage signal sent by the
DC controller PCB in serial.
The microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB sends the intensity adjustment signal (PWM_1KHz) in response to the scanning lamp active voltage signal. In turn, the
phase control circuit (HIC 001) controls the voltage supplied to the scanning lamp.
The PWM_1KHz signal varies according to the setting of VR107 mounted on the DC controller PCB between 10% and 90% in terms of pulse duty ratio or between 50.5 and 80 V for the 120 V
model (between 85.7 and 145.8 V for the 220/240 V model) in terms of actual voltage by way of
phase control.
However, the intensity remains a specific value for AE exposure so that it is 56 V for the 120 V
model (108.5 V for the 220/240 V model) in terms of actual voltage.
t [msec]
<PWM_1KHz signal>
ON
OFF
1
[msec]
1kHz
1
Pulse duty= t/ 1k × 100 [%]
Figure 3-202
c.
Monitoring the Activation of the Scanning Lamp
The activation detection signal (LAMP_DETECT) is sent to the microprocessor (Q900) on the
composite power supply PCB as long as the scanning lamp remains on.
The composite power supply PCB sends the lamp activation signal to the DC controller PCB in
serial by way of monitoring the activation of the scanning lamp (LA1).
Related Error Code
E220
• The lamp activation detection signal is not detected for 1 sec or more although the scanning lamp activation signal has been sent.
• The lamp activation detection signal has been detected for 1 sec or more although the
scanning lamp activation signal is not sent.
If an error has been detected, the power switch will be turned off after indicating an error code
for 2 sec.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-11
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:
1. ! Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for
safety.
2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble
it.
3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and
Varistors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)
5. As necessary, cut the harness band.
6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.
7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any
screws indiscriminately.
3-12
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
A.
Scanner Drive Assembly
1.
Removing the Scanner/Lens Drive
Motor
1) Remove the front lower cover.
(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing the
Front Lower Cover.”)
2) Remove the copyboard glass.
(See Chapter 7.III.C.1.“Removing the
Copyboard Glass.”)
3) Remove the four screws [1], and detach
the lens cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
Figure 3-301
4) Disconnect the connector (J110) [3] from
the DC controller PCB.
[3]
Figure 3-302
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-13
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
5) Open the machine’s top unit farther, and
hold it in position using the handle (about
30 mm in diameter) of a screwdriver.
Figure 3-303
6) Remove the machine’s two fixing screws
[4] from the scanner/lens drive motor [5].
[5]
[4]
[4]
Figure 3-304
3-14
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
7) Free the top unit (by removing the screwdriver), and close the top unit.
8) Remove the E-ring [6]; then, lift the cable
drive pulley [7] slightly, and detach the
scanner/lens drive motor [5].
[6]
Lift.
[5]
[7]
Figure 3-305
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-15
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
2.
Outline of the Scanner Drive Cable
Wind 1.5 times.
(black cable)
Wind 7.5 times.
(silver-colored cable)
Figure 3-306
3-16
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
3.
a.
Routing the Scanner Drive Cable
Before Starting the Work
Prepare the following:
• Mirror positioning tool
• Cable clip
• Adhesive tape
1) Set the mirror positioning tool as shown.
Figure 3-307
2) Prepare about five strips of adhesive tape
(each one about 20 × 50 mm).
3) Remove the copyboard glass.
(See Chapter 7.III.C.1.“Removing the
Copyboard Glass.”)
4) Disconnect the connectors (J101, J131)
[1] from the DC controller PCB.
[1]
Figure 3-308
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-17
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
5) If the machine is equipped with an ADF,
free the hook [2], and disconnect the two
relay connectors [3] from the left upper
stay [4].
[4]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[2]
Figure 3-309
6) Remove the three screws [5], and detach
the left upper stay [4].
[5]
[5]
[4]
Figure 3-310
3-18
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
7) Remove the four screws [6], and detach
the lens cover [7].
[6]
[6]
[7]
Figure 3-311
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-19
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
b. Routing the Reversing Cable
1) Wind the reversing cables (silver-colored)
[2] on the cable drive pulley [1] 7.5 times
with the longer end on top; then, secure it
in position with a cable clip [3].
[1]
Longer end
Shorter end
[2]
Face with a marking
Figure 3-312
[3]
[1]
[3]
Top View
Figure 3-313
3-20
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
2) Put the cable drive pulley [1] into the shaft
[4], and secure it in position with an Ering [5].
When putting the cable drive pulley into
the shaft, be sure that the hook is at the
front.
[5]
Hook
[1]
(front)
[4]
Figure 3-314
3) Hook the shorter end [6] on the pulley [7].
[7]
[6]
Figure 3-315
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-21
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
4) Lead the shorter end [6] under the No. 1
mirror mount [8] and the No. 2/3 mirror
mount [9]; then, hook it on the left rear
pulley [10] and the pulley [11] of the No.
2/3 mirror mount.
[11]
[9]
[8]
[10]
[6]
Figure 3-316
5) After fitting the shorter end [6] on the
cable hook [12], secure its end with adhesive tape [13].
Be sure that the secured end of the cable is
found where the hole in the left side plate
and the tip of the cable matches.
[13]
[12]
[6]
Figure 3-317
6) Lead the longer end [14] along the cable
drive pulley, and hook it on the pulley
[15] on the right front side.
[14]
[15]
Figure 3-318
3-22
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
7) Lead the longer end [14] under the No. 1
mirror mount [8] and the No. 2/3 mirror
mount [9]; then, hook it on the pulley [16]
on the left front side and the pulley [17] of
the No. 2/3 mirror mount.
[17]
[8]
[16]
[14]
[9]
Figure 3-319
8) Hook the longer end [14] on the cable
hook [18]; then, secure its end to the left
side with adhesive tape [19].
Be sure that the secured end of the cable is
found where the hole in the left side plate
and the tip of the cable matches.
[18]
[19]
[14]
Figure 3-320
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-23
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
c. Routing the Forwarding Cable
1) Fit the longer end forwarding cable
(black) [2] on the top hook of the cable
drive pulley [1], and wind it 1.5 times.
Then, secure the shorter end [3] as shown
with adhesive tape [4].
[4]
Face without a marking
[3]
[2]
[1]
Figure 3-321
2) Lead the longer end [5] along the cable
drive pulley [1] as shown, and hook it on
the pulley [6] on the right front side.
[1]
[5]
[6]
Figure 3-322
[8]
3) Lead the longer end [5] under the No. 1
mirror mount [7]; then, hook it on the pulley [8] of the No. 2/3 mirror mount, and
lead it between the No. 1 mirror mount [7]
and the scanning lamp [9].
[7]
[9]
[5]
Figure 3-323
3-24
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
4) Hook the end of the longer end [5] on the
hole [10] on the right side.
[10]
[5]
Figure 3-324
5) Free the shorter end [3], and hook it on the
pulley [11] on the right rear side.
[3]
[11]
Figure 3-325
6) Lead the shorter end [3] under the No. 1
mirror mount [7], and hook it on the pulley [12] of the No. 2/3 mirror mount as
shown; then, lead it between the No. 1
mirror mount [7] and the scanning lamp
[9].
[12]
[3]
[9]
[7]
Figure 3-326
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-25
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
7) Hook the end of the shorter end [3] on the
hole [13] on the right side.
[3]
[13]
Figure 3-327
8) Free the shorter end [3] and the longer end
[5] (reversing cable), and connect both
with a spring [14]; then, fit the stopper
[15].
[14]
[3]
[15]
[5]
Figure 3-328
3-26
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
9) Detach the pulley clip [16] from the cable
drive pulley [1].
[1]
[16]
Figure 3-329
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-27
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
d. Positioning the No. 1 Mirror Mount
1) Fix the rear and the front of the No. 1 mirror mount [1] temporarily to the metal fixing [2] of the forwarding cable.
[1]
[2]
Figure 3-330 (rear)
[2]
[1]
Figure 3-331 (front)
3-28
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
2) Turn the cable drive pulley [4] so that the
three shafts [3] of the mirror positioning
tool for rear and front is as shown.
[3]
[4]
[3]
Figure 3-332 (rear)
[3]
[3]
Figure 3-333 (front)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-29
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
3) While keeping the condition of step 2),
tighten the positioning screw on the rear
and front of the No. 1 mirror mount [1].
[1]
Figure 3-334 (rear)
[1]
Figure 3-335 (front)
3-30
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
B.
Lens Drive Assembly
1. Removing the Lens Cable
1) Turn on the power; when the lens has
moved to the Direct position, disconnect
the power plug.
2) Remove the copyboard glass.
(See Chapter 7.III.C.1.“Removing the
Copyboard Glass.”)
3) Remove the main drive assembly.
(See Chapter 7.III.D.2.“Removing the
Main Drive Assembly.”)
4) Remove the four screws [1], and detach
the lens cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
Figure 3-336
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-31
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
5) Mark the position of the lens cable fixing
plate [3] and the lens mount [4] with a
scriber.
[3]
Marking
Caution:
When routing the lens cable, be sure to
refer to the marking made with a scriber.
[4]
Figure 3-337
6) Disengage the lever [5] of the No. 4/5 mirror mount and the gear [6].
[6]
[5]
Figure 3-338
3-32
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
7) Remove the screw [7], and detach the cam
gear [6] and the cable retainer [8].
[7]
[6]
[8]
Figure 3-339
8) Holding the middle of the No. 1 mirror
mount [9], move it to the center of the
machine.
[9]
Caution:
Do not hold the reflecting plate.
Figure 3-340
9) Remove the spring [10].
[10]
Figure 3-341
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-33
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
10) Remove the screw [11], and detach the
lens cable fixing plate [12].
[11]
[12]
Figure 3-342
11) Free the lens cable [13] from the lens
cable fixing plate [12]; then, detach the
lens cable from the machine.
[13]
[12]
Figure 3-343
3-34
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
2. Routing the Lens Cable
1) After routing the lens cable, keep the lever
[1] of the No. 4/5 mirror mount disengaged from the cam gear [2] (so that the
lever will not come into contact when the
cam gear rotates).
[2]
[1]
Figure 3-344
2) While keeping the condition in step 1),
turn on the power; when the No. 1 mirror
mount and the lens stopped moving, turn
off the power.
• The lens will move to the Direct position.
3) Check to make sure that the tip of the lever [1] of the No. 4/5 mirror mount and
the marking [3] on the top face of the cam
gear [2] match; then, engage the lever [1]
and the cam gear [2].
[2]
[3]
[1]
Figure 3-345
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-35
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
4) If the tip of the lever [1] and the marking
on the cam gear [2] do not match, remove
the fixing screw [4] of the cam gear [2]
and detach the cam gear; then, mount the
cam gear once again so that the marking
on it and the tip of the lever match.
[4]
[2]
[1]
Figure 3-346
3-36
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
C.
Exposure System
1. Removing the Scanning Lamp
1) Disconnect the power plug.
2) Remove the copyboard glass.
(See Chapter 7.III.C.1. “Removing the
Copyboard Glass.”)
3) Holding the middle of the No. 1 mirror
mount [1], move the No. 1 mirror mount
[1] to the right by about 5 cm.
[1]
Cauiton:
Do not hold the reflecting plate.
Figure 3-347
4) Free the harness [3] from the guide [2];
then, remove the screw [4], and detach the
reflecting plate [5].
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2]
Figure 3-348
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-37
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
5) While pushing the electrode mount [6]
found at the rear of the machine in the direction of the arrow, detach the scanning
lamp [7].
Caution:
1. Do not start the work if the scanning
lamp is hot.
2. Do not leave fingerprints on the surface of the scanning lamp.
3. If the surface of the scanning lamp is
soiled, dry wipe it.
[6]
[7]
Figure 3-349
3-38
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
2.
Points to Note When Mounting the
Lamp
When mounting the scanning lamp, be
sure that the logo mark (or the name of the
manufacturer) is toward the front. Further, be
sure that the protrusion near the middle of the
lamp is as shown.
Caution:
• Do not touch the lamp portion.
• If you have replaced the scanning lamp,
be sure to perform intensity adjustment (p.
11-42) and AE adjustment (p. 11-43).
Logo mark
(front)
Scanning lamp
(mirror mount moving in reverse)
45 (approx.)
Figure 3-350
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-39
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
3. Removing the Thermal Fuse
1) Disconnect the power plug.
2) Remove the copyboard glass.
(See Chapter 7.III.C.1.“Removing the
Copyboard Glass.”)
3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the thermal fuse [2].
[2]
[1]
Figure 3-351
4.
Points to Note When Mounting the
Fuse
When mounting the thermal fuse, be sure
that the thermal fuse is oriented as shown.
Make sure that the fuse is in contact with
the reflecting plate.
Reflecting plate
(front)
Thermal fuse
Figure 3-352
3-40
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM
5. Removing the Thermistor Unit
1) Remove the top cover.
(See Chapter 7.III.A.1. “Removing the
Top Cover.”)
2) Disconnect the connector (J131) [1] from
the DC controller PCB; remove the screw
[2], and detach the thermistor unit [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
Figure 3-353
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
3-41
CHAPTER 4
IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
This chapter discusses the principles of how images are formed. It also explains the
timing at which the various units involved in image formation are operated, and shows
how they may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
I.
IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM ...4-1
A. Outline ...................................4-1
B. Timing Chart for the Image
Formation System .................4-3
C. Controlling the Primary
Charging Roller Bias .............4-4
D. Controlling the Transfer
Roller Bias .............................4-8
E. Controlling the Developing/
Separation Static Eliminator
Bias .................................... 4-11
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
F.
II.
Measuring the Density of
Originals ............................. 4-16
G. Controlling the Side Blanking
Mechanism ......................... 4-21
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 4-22
A. Cartridge ............................ 4-23
B. Transfer Charging
Assembly ............................ 4-25
C. Blank Exposure .................. 4-26
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
I.
A.
IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
Outline
The major functions of the image formation system are as follows:
Item
Controlling the primary charging
roller bias
Description
AC constant current control, on/off control
DC constant voltage control, on/off control
DC voltage level control
Transfer roller bias control
DC constant voltage control, on/off control
DC constant current control (ATVC, cleaning bias)
Voltage level control
Polarity switching
Developing/separation static
eliminator bias control
DC constant voltage control, on/off control
AC constant voltage control, on/off control
DC voltage level control
Density control
Developing DC bias control
Blanking control
Side blanking lamp
Table 4-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-1
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
Copyboard glass
Scanning lamp
Lens
AE sensor
Side
blanking
lamp
Developing cylinder
Primary charging roller
Photosensitive
drum
Drum cartridge
Static eliminator
Lamp regulator
block
Transfer roller
High-voltage
circuit block
Q101
Microprocessor
Q900
Microprocessor
DC controller PCB
Composite power supply
PCB
Figure 4-101
4-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
B.
Timing Chart for the Image Formation System
Basic Sequence of Operations (Direct, 2 copies, continuous)
Copy Start key
ON
,
STBY INTR
Main motor (M1)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
Scanner
Primary AC bias
Primary DC bias
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Transfer bias
Transfer cleaning bias
Transfer reference
bias (ATVC)
Static eliminator bias
Pre-registration roller
paper sensor (Q751)
-400V
SCFW
SCRV
forward
Reverse
-625V
SCFW
0.5sec.(approx.)
SCRV
LSTR STBY
0.6sec.(approx.)
-500V
0.6sec.(approx.)
3200V
Figure 4-102
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-3
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
C.
Controlling the Primary Charging Roller Bias
1.
Outline
The circuit shown in Figure 4-103 is used to control the voltage applied to the primary charging
roller, and has the following functions:
• Turning on and off the DC/AC bias
• Controlling the DC bias to a specific voltage
• Controlling the AC bias to a specific voltage
• Switching the level of the DC bias
Both DC bias and AC bias are applied to the primary charging roller so as to ensure that the
surface potential of the photosensitive drum will be uniform. The level of the DC bias is switched
between when forming copy images and when not forming copy images.
Reference:
DC component:
AC component:
4-4
-400 V (non-image area)/-625 V (image area)
2000 Vpp to 3000 Vpp (885µA)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
Main
transformer
T101
Voltage
separation
circuit
T508
High-voltage
transformer
for primary
charging
Primary
charging
roller
Amplifier
AC bias output signal
PAC_OUT
AC component current monitor signal
PAC_S
DC voltage monitor signal
PDC_S
DC bias control signal
PDC_PWM
Photosensitive
drum
PR_DC_ON
J103
-4
J203
-5
Microprocessor (Q900)
Composite power supply PCB
Serial communication
Microprocessor (Q101)
DC controller PCB
Figure 4-103
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-5
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
2.
a.
Operations
Turning On and Off the DC Bias
The DC bias applied to the primary charging roller is turned on or off by the serial communication signal and the primary charging bias ON signal (PR_DC_ON) from the DC controller PCB.
When the Copy Start key is pressed, the DC bias ON signal (serial) and the primary charging
bias ON signal (PR_DC_ON) are sent. The microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply
PCB generates the DC bias control signal (PDC_PWM) based on the combination of the serial
signal and the PR_DC_ON signal, applying a DC bias to the primary charging roller.
DC bias ON
(image area)
DC bias ON
(non-image area)
DC bias OFF
DC bias ON signal
(8-bit signal communication)
bit0
bit1
1
–
PR_DC_ON
(J103-4)
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
Table 4-102 Relationship between DC Bias Output and Signal
b.
Turning On and Off the AC Bias
The AC bias applied to the primary charging roller is turned on and off by the serial communication signal from the DC controller PCB.
When the AC bias ON signal arrives from the DC controller PCB, the microprocessor (Q900)
on the composite power supply PCB generates the AC bias output signal (PAC_OUT), thereby
applying an AC bias to the primary charging roller.
c.
Controlling the DC/AC Bias to a Specific Voltage/Current
The DC bias and the AC bias applied to the primary charging roller are controlled by the
microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB so that they remain a specific level.
When a DC/AC bias is generated, the microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply
PCB detects the DC voltage monitor signal (PDC_S) and the AC component current monitor signal
(PAC_S), compares their levels against the reference levels, and varies the DC bias control signal
(PDC_PWM) and the AC bias output signal (PAC_OUT) according to the differences so as to
ensure that they remain specific levels.
Reference:
The DC bias control signal varies its pulse duty ratio while the AC bias output signal varies its
amplitude to change the level of the DC/AC bias.
4-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
d.
Switching the DC Bias Level
The machine switches the DC bias level between the copy image area (-625 V) and the noncopy image area (-400 V).
The level of the DC bias is switched by the DC bias ON signal (serial signal) generated by the
DC controller PCB.
The microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB varies the DC bias control
signal (PDC_PWM) to switch the level of the DC bias. (See Table 4-102.)
Reference:
The machine applies a DC bias over a non-copy image area (between sheets) so as to prevent
charging the photosensitive drum to a positive potential otherwise caused by the cleaning bias
from the transfer roller.
,,
,
Copy Start key
ON
Main motor (M1)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
Primary DC bias
Primary AC bias
STBY INTR
SCFW
-400V
-625V
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV LSTR STBY
Figure 4-104
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-7
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
D.
Controlling the Transfer Roller Bias
1.
Outline
The circuit shown in Figure 4-105 is used to control the voltage applied to the transfer charging
roller, and has the following functions:
• Turning on and off the transfer bias.
• Controlling the transfer bias to a constant voltage.
• Correcting the transfer bias voltage level (ATVC)
• Switching the transfer bias polarity (cleaning bias)
Main
transformer
Transfer positive DC
bias generation circuit
T101
(Q101)
(Q900)
Photosensitive
drum
Transfer positive DC bias ON signal
T_REV_ON*
Transfer overcurrent detection signal
HV_LIMIT
Transfer
charging
roller
Transfer current detection signal
T_FW_S
Serial
communication
Microprocessor
Microprocessor
Transfer bias voltage
detection signal
Transfer bias
T_FEEDBACK
detection circuit
Transfer DC bias
control signal
T_FW_DRV
Transfer bias
control circuit
+24V
T302
Transfer
high-voltage
transformer
Transfer DC bias ON signal
T_FW_ON
High-voltage transformer
control signal
CLK32K
DC controller PCB
Composite power supply PCB
Figure 4-105
4-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
2.
a.
Operations
Turning On and Off the Transfer Bias
The transfer bias applied to the transfer charging roller is turned on and off by the serial communication signal from the DC controller PCB.
When the transfer bias ON signal (serial signal) is generated by the DC controller PCB, the
microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB generates the high-voltage transformer control signal (CLK32K), transfer DC bias ON signal (T_FW_ON), and transfer DC bias
control signal (T_FW_DRV), thereby applying the transfer bias to the transfer charging roller.
Negative transfer bias ON
Positive transfer bias ON
(cleaning bias)
Transfer bias OFF
ATVC
Transfer bias ON signal
(serial communication)
bit2
bit3
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
T-FW_ON signal
T_REV_ON* signal
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
Table 4-103 Relationship between Transfer Bias Output and Signals
b.
Controlling the Transfer Bias to a Specific Voltage
The transfer bias applied to the transfer charging roller is controlled to a specific level by the
microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB.
When a transfer bias is generated, the microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply
PCB checks the transfer bias voltage detection signal (T_FEEDBACK), compares it against the
reference value, and varies the transfer DC bias control signal (T_FW_DRV) according to the
difference to ensure that the transfer bias remains a specific level at all times.
Reference:
The level of transfer bias applied to the transfer roller during a copying run is between -7.5
and -3.0 kV.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-9
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
c.
Correcting the Transfer Bias Voltage Level (ATVC control)
The machine automatically corrects the application voltage level of the transfer bias to correct
the changes in the transfer efficiency caused by the deterioration of the transfer roller or the
changes in the environment.
A current of a specific level (-14.6 µA) is applied to the transfer charging roller during initial
rotation executed each time the Copy Start key is pressed. The microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB checks the transfer current detection signal (T_FW_S), and varies the
transfer bias applied to the transfer charging roller so that it will be an appropriate level.
Reference:
While the transfer charging roller makes a single rotation, the microprocessor (Q900) checks
the transfer current detection signal four times, and determines the level of the transfer bias to
apply using the average of the readings.
d.
Switching the Polarity of the Transfer Bias (cleaning bias)
The machine uses a direct charging method, allowing toner to move from the photosensitive
drum to the transfer roller as when a jam occurs if left unattended.
To remove excess toner, a positive voltage is applied to the transfer roller as follows, thereby
returning the toner from the roller to the drum:
< Timing >
• While initial rotation is executed after the Copy Start key is pressed
• Part of the period in which the scanner is moved in reverse
• Part of the period in which last rotation is executed
The polarity of the transfer bias is switched by the transfer bias ON signal (serial signal) generated by the DC controller PCB.
In response to the signal, the microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB
causes the transfer positive DC bias On signal (T_REV_ON*) to go ‘0’, so that the positive component of the transfer bias (constant current control, + 1.56µA/2.5 kV max.) will be applied to the
transfer roller. (See Table 4-103.)
Copy Start key
ON
STBY INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
1.2sec (approx.)
Cleaning bias
Reference bias (ATVC)
0.7sec (approx.)
1.6sec(approx.)
0.8sec (approx.)
Transfer bias
Figure 4-106
4-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
E.
Controlling the Developing/Separation Static Eliminator Bias
1.
Outline
The circuit shown in Figure 4-107 is used to control the voltage applied to the developing
assembly and the separation static eliminator, and has the following functions:
• Turning on and off the developing DC bias
• Turning on and off the AC bias (turning on and off the static eliminator bias)
• Controlling the voltage level of the developing DC bias
Both AC bias and DC bias are applied to the developing cylinder while copies are being made.
When the photosensitive drum rotates and yet developing is not under way, about -500 VDC is
applied to the developing cylinder regardless of the position of the density adjusting lever, thereby
preventing adhesion of excess toner on the photosensitive drum.
Reference :
Developing DC bias : -80 ~ -550V
Developing AC bias : 1200Vpp ± 10%
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-11
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
High-voltage transformer
for developing/static eliminator
Main
transformer
Developing
DC bias
detection
circuit
T101
T201
+5V
Photo
sensitive
drum
Developing
cylinder
Static
eliminator
bias generation
circuit
Static eliminator
DC bias control signal
BIAS_PWM
DC bias monitor signal
BIAS_S
AC bias oscillation signal
ACBIAS
+
DV_AC_ON
-7
-2
DV_DC_ON
J103
-3
J203
-6
Microprocessor (Q900)
Composite power supply PCB
Serial communication
Copy
density
correction
signal
Copy density
setting signal
AE signal
Microprocessor (Q101)
Density
correction
switch (SW101)
DC controller PCB
AE sensor
PCB
Control
panel
Figure 4-107
4-12
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
2.
Turning On and Off the DC Bias
The DC bias applied to the developing cylinder is turned on and off by the signal communication signal and the developing DC bias ON signal (DV_DC_ON) generated by the DC controller
PCB.
When the developing DCON signal (serial signal) and the developing DC bias ON sign
(DV_DC_ON) are generated by the DC controller PCB, the microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB sends the DC bias control signal (BIAS_PWM), thereby applying a DC
bias to the developing cylinder.
DC bias ON
DC bias ON
(- 500V)
DC bias OFF
Developing DCON signal
(Serial communication)
bit5
bit6
–
1
0
1
0
0
DV_DC_ON
(J103-3)
0
1
1
Table 4-104 Relationship between Developing DC Bias and Signals
3.
Turning On and Off the AC Bias
The AC bias is turned on and off by the developing AC bias ON signal (DV_AC_ON) generated by the DC controller PCB.
The DC controller PCB sends the developing AC bias ON signal (DV_AC_ON) to the composite power supply PCB a specific period of time after copy paper has moved past the registration
sensor. The microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB generates the AC bias
oscillation signal (ACBIAS) so that an AC bias is applied to the developing cylinder.
The AC bias is modified/rectified and then supplied to the static eliminator (static eliminator
bias, about 3.2 kV).
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-13
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
4.
Controlling the Voltage Level of the Developing DC Bias
The DC bias control signal (BIAS_PWM) is varied according to the following settings to
change the DC component of the developing bias so as to control the copy density:
• Setting of the density adjusting lever (in manual adjustment mode)
• Output of the AE sensor (in automatic control mode)
• Setting of copy mode (toner save mode, photo mode)
• Setting of the density correction switch (SW101)
The density correction switch (SW101) mounted on the DC controller PCB may be set to any
of three levels, enabling correction of foggy images or light images caused as by a change in the
sensitivity of the photosensitive drum.
The density correction switch (SW101) affects both manual density adjustment and auto density adjustment (AE).
SW101
Figure 4-108
If the machine is not equipped with a density correction switch (SW101), the image density
changes in AE mode according to how the density adjusting lever is set.
The machine corrects the level of the developing DC bias and the voltage supplied to the
scanning lamp as follows in reference to the setting used for normal copying when toner save mode
or photo mode is selected.
Developing DC bias
Voltage supplied to
the scanning lamp
Toner save mode
-75V
-2V*1
-3V*2
Photo mode
+15V
-2V*1
-3V*2
*1: 120 V model
*2: 220 / 240 V model
Table 4-105 Relationship between Copying Mode and Voltage Correction Level
Figures 4-109 through -112 show the changes in the DC bias occurring as a result of changes in
the output of the AE sensor during auto density correction and how the density adjusting lever is set
during manual density adjustment.
4-14
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
Copy density adjusting lever
0
Test sheet
Original
Newspaper density
1
-100
-100
-200
-200
Position of
SW101
-300
3.5
6.5
9
0
-300
Right
-400
Center
Position of
SW101
-400
Left
-500
Right
-500
Center
Left
Developing bias
DC component (V)
Developing bias
DC component (V)
Manual Density Mode
AE Mode
Figure 4-109 (SW101)
Figure 4-110 (SW101)
Copy density adjusting lever
0
Test sheet
Original
Newspaper density
-100
3.5
6.5
9
-100
-200
F1
-300
-200
-300
F5
-400
-500
F9
Developing bias
DC component (V)
-400
-500
Developing bias
DC component (V)
AE Mode
Figure 4-111 (Non-SW101)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
1
0
Manual Density Mode
Figure 4-112 (Non-SW101)
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-15
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
F.
Measuring the Density of Originals
1.
Outline
The machine is equipped with an auto density adjustment (AE) mechanism designed to control
the DC component of the developing bias.
The AE mechanism enables production of copies free of fogging as long as the original is more
or less uniform in density by varying the DC component of the developing bias according to the
density of the original.
Scanning lamp
Developing
cylinder
VR103
J601 J107
-3 -2
+
+24V
(Q101)
+24V
AEREF
+5V
Photosensitive
drum
+
+24V
-3
+5V
AE sensor
+24V
+
VR102
DC controller PCB
(Q900)
Developing
DCON signal
Serial
communication
Microprocessor
AE
Microprocessor
-2
+
Composite power
supply PCB
Figure 4-113
4-16
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
2.
Operations
When measuring the density of an original, the scanner turns on the scanning lamp, and moves
to a point 115 mm from the home position. At this time, the AE sensor reads the level of light
reflected by the area shown in Figure 4-112, and sends the AE signal (AE) to the DC controller
PCB.
In response, the DC controller PCB sends the developing DCON signal (serial communication) to the composite power supply PCB according to the level of the AE signal. The microprocessor (Q900) on the composite power supply PCB controls the level of the DC bias applied to the
developing cylinder based on the level of this signal.
68.8mm
(approx.)
23.5mm
(approx.)
5.8mm
(approx.)
Middle of
original
37.7mm
(approx.)
: Area read by AE sensor
Figure 4-114
Copy Start key
ON
STBY INTR AER
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
Scanner / lens drive
motor (M2)
Scanning lamp (LA1)
AE signal (AE)
Figure 4-115
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-17
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
3.
AE Adjustment (VR102, VR103)
If you have replaced the scanning lamp or the AE sensor PCB, make adjustments as follows:
Operating Procedure
Before Starting the Work
• Obtain a newspaper showing more or less even print. (Do not use one with many photos or
large headings.)
• Obtain five sheets of white sheets of paper.
• Check to make sure that the intensity of the scanning lamp has been adjusted when you have
replaced the scanning lamp.
• Set the density correction switch (SW101) to the middle setting. If the machine is not
equipped with a density correction switch, set the density adjusting lever to the middle setting.
1) Short JP103 and JP104 on the DC controller PCB with a screwdriver or the like.
J104
J103
Figure 4-116
4-18
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
2) While keeping the condition in step 1), turn on the power switch.
• The scanning lamp will turn on, an the main motor (M1) will rotate.
3) Stop shorting JP103 and JP104.
4) Turn VR103 on the DC controller PCB fully clockwise.
VR103
Figure 4-117
5) Place a newspaper on the copyboard, and close the copyboard cover.
6) Turn VR102 so that the reading in the indicator is from ‘A3’ to ‘Ad’.
VR102
Figure 4-118
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-19
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
7) Remove the newspaper from the copyboard; in its place, place five blank sheets of copy paper,
and close the copyboard cover.
8) Turn VR103 on the DC controller PCB so that the reading of the indicator is from ‘52’ to ‘5c’.
VR103
Figure 4-119
9) Repeat steps 5) through 8) so that the values of both VR102 and VR103 are target values.
Caution:
If you cannot set VR102 and VR103 to the target values at the same time, turn VR103 fully
counterclockwise, and go back to step 5) and make adjustments once again.
10) Make a copy, and check to make sure that it is free of fogging and the density of its characters
is good.
• If it is foggy or the characters are too light, go back to step 1) and start over.
• If no change is noted after re-adjustment, use the density correcting switch (SW101).
Lighter
Darker
SW101
Figure 4-120
4-20
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
G.
Controlling the Side Blanking Mechanism
1.
Outline
The machine is equipped with a side blanking lamp at the front and the rear used to prevent
adhesion of excess toner when making reduced copies.
2.
Operations
To blank out the non-image area in reduce mode, the side blanking lamp is moved in relation to
the distance over which the lens moves as detected by the lens shift detecting shaft.
Rear side
blanking lamp
Reflecting
plate
Lens shift detecting shaft
Front side
blanking lamp
Reflecting
plate
(front)
Figure 4-121
A
B
,
B
Photosensitive drum
Non-image area in Reduce mode
,
A
A: Position of the side blanking lamp in Direct and Reduce mode
B: Position of the side blanking lamp in Reduce mode
Figure 4-122
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-21
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:
1. ! Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for
safety.
2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble
it.
3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and Varistors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)
5. As necessary, cut the harnessband.
6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.
7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any
screws indiscriminately.
4-22
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
A.
Cartridge
1.
Outline
The machine's photosensitive drum, primary charging roller, developing assembly, and cleaner
are housed in a single container referred to as a “cartridge.” (You cannot disassemble the cartridge.)
Developing blade
Primary charging roller Light-blocking shutter
Photosensitive
drum
Cleaning blade
Drum cover shutter
Developing cylinder
Figure 4-201
a.
Drum Cover Shutter
If exposed to strong light for a long time, the photosensitive drum can develop photo memory,
which can cause white spots or black bands on copies.
To prevent photo memory, the machine is equipped with a drum cover shutter. Do not open the
shutter unless absolutely necessary. It is designed to open when the cartridge is fit into the machine
and the machine's top unit is closed.
b.
Light-Blocking Shutter
When the cartridge is removed from the machine, light makes its way through the opening used
to expose images. As in the case of the drum cover shutter, the light-blocking shutter is provided to
protect the photosensitive drum from light.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-23
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
2.
Cleaning the Drum
Caution:
As a rule, do not touch or clean the photosensitive drum.
1) Open the machine's top unit, and take out the cartridge.
2) Turn over the cartridge, and open the drum cover shutter
3) Clean the drum surface with a flannel cloth coated with toner.
Caution:
1. If you need to rotate the drum, be sure to rotate it in the direction in which it rotates when
making copies. Otherwise, the leaf spring used to apply a developing bias to the developing cylinder will develop poor contact.
2. If you must clean it, use a flannel cloth. Do not use paper, lint-free or otherwise.
3. If exposed to light for an appreciable time, the images will be affected. Be sure to work
briskly.
Reference:
If the photosensitive drum is exposed to light of 1500 lux (ordinary lighting) for 5 min and
then is left alone for 5 min in a dark place, it will recover to a level at which it will cause no
practical problem.
However, avoid exposing it to direct sunlight. The rays of the sun are usually about 10000 to
30000 lux.
4-24
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
B.
Transfer Charging
Assembly
1.
Removing the Transfer Charging
Roller
1) Open the machine's top unit.
2) Remove the screw [1].
3) While freeing the claw [2] of the bushing,
detach the transfer charging roller [3].
[2]
Caution:
Do not touch the surface of the roller. Be
sure the surface is free of dirt.
[3]
[2]
[1]
Figure 4-202
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-25
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
C.
1.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Blank Exposure
Removing the Blanking Exposure
Unit
Set the machine to the maximum ratio
(141%) as follows:
• Turn on the power, and select a default
ratio of 141%.
• Press the Copy Start key.
• When the lens has moved to the farthest
left, turn off the power.
• Disconnect the power plug.
Remove the front lower cover.
(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing the
Front Lower Cover.”)
Remove the cartridge.
Remove the DC controller PCB.
(See Chapter 7.III.E.1.“Removing the DC
controller PCB.”)
Remove the composite power supply
PCB.
(See Chapter 7.III.E.2.“Removing the
Composite Power Supply PCB.”)
Remove the two screws [1].
[1]
Figure 4-203
4-26
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM
7) Open the machine’s top unit farther, and
hold it in place using the handle of a
screwdriver (about 30 mm in diameter).
Figure 4-204
8) Remove the four screws [3], and disconnect the connector [4]; then, detach the
blanking exposure unit. [5].
[5]
[4]
[3]
Figure 4-205
Caution:
When mounting the blanking exposure
unit, check to make sure that the blanking exposure unit PCBs are at the extreme ends and that the lens is positioned
at the farthest left (141% position).
Lamp PCBs
Figure 4-206
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
4-27
CHAPTER 5
PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
This chapter explains the principles used from when copy paper is picked up to when
a copy is delivered in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in
relation to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/
assembled and adjusted.
I.
II.
PICKUP/FEEDING SYSTEM.......5-1
A. Outline ...................................5-1
B. Controlling the Pickup
Roller .....................................5-3
C. Controlling the Movement of
Paper .....................................5-9
D. Detecting Jams .................. 5-12
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 5-18
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
Pickup Assembly ................
Multifeeder Assembly .........
Single-feeder Assembly .....
Feeding Assembly ..............
Registration Roller
Assembly ............................
Delivery Assembly ..............
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-19
5-28
5-31
5-33
5-34
5-36
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
I.
A.
PICKUP/FEEDING SYSTEM
Outline
The machine moves paper using a center reference method, in which paper is moved in the
middle of the pickup/feeding path, and is equipped with a cassette, multifeeder, and single-feeder
as the source of paper.
From the cassette, multifeeder, or single-feeder, copy paper is picked up and is controlled by
the registration roller so that its leading edge will match the leading edge of the image on the
photosensitive drum; it is then moved through the transfer, separation, feeding, and fixing assemblies to reach the copy tray.
The machine is equipped with four sensors used to monitor the movement of copy paper.
Notation
PS3
Name
Delivery sensor
PS4
Vertical path roller paper sensor
PS5
Single-feeder paper sensor
Q751
Remarks
Single-feeder model only
Pre-registration roller paper sensor
Table 5-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-1
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
Photosensitive
drum
Registration roller
Delivery roller
PS3
Static
eliminator
Fixing assembly
Copy tray
Multifeeder
pickup roller
Vertical path roller paper
detection signal(PDP)
Delivery paper detection
signal(DPD)
Pre-registration roller paper
detection signal(RPD)
DC controller PCB
PS4
Vertical
path roller
Q751
Cassette
pickup roller
Cassette
Holding plate
Figure 5-101 (Multifeeder type)
PS3
Static
eliminator
Fixing assembly
Q751
Cassette
pickup roller
Vertical path roller paper
detection signal(PDP)
Photosensitive
drum
Registration roller
Delivery roller
Copy tray
Singlefeeder
pickup
roller
Single-feeder paper
detection signal(SFPD)
Delivery paper
detection signal(DPD)
Pre-registration roller paper
detection signal(RPD)
DC controller PCB
PS5
PS4
Vertical
path roller
Cassette
Holding plate
Figure 5-102 (Single-feeder type)
5-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
B.
Controlling the Pickup Roller
1.
Outline
The machine has three types of pickup rollers, i.e., cassette pickup roller, multifeeder pickup
roller, and single-feeder pickup roller, and each of these rollers are operated by the drive of the
main motor switched by means of a gear unit. (In other words, only one roller is driven at any one
time.)
2.
Controlling the Cassette Pickup Roller
The cassette pickup roller is controlled by a spring clutch, control ring, pickup clutch solenoid
(SL1), and cassette pickup solenoid (SL5).
When the pickup clutch solenoid turns on, the claw moves away from the control ring, allowing the drive to move to the pickup gear assembly through the spring clutch. Then, when the cassette pickup solenoid turns on, the drive reaches the cassette pickup roller.
When the cassette pickup roller starts to rotate, copy paper is picked up from the cassette and is
sent as far as the registration roller by way of the vertical path roller. The registration roller controls
paper so that its leading edge will match the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum.
Spring
Gear
Pickup clutch
solenoid
drive signal
(PUSLD*)
Cassette pickup solenoid drive signal (CPUSD*)
DC controller PCB
Pickup roller
Pickup roller gear
Arm
SL1
M1
When SL5 turns on, the spring causes
the pickup roller to rotate slightly,
causing the gear and the pickup roller
gear to engage.
Cassette pickup rollers
Pickup clutch
SL5
Copy paper
Figure 5-103 (Multifeeder type)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-3
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
Spring
Pickup clutch solenoid
drive signal (PUSLD*)
Cassette pickup solenoid drive signal (CPUSD*)
DC controller PCB
M1
Arm
Gear
Pickup roller
Pickup roller gear
SL1
When SL5 turns on, the spring causes
the pickup roller to rotate slightly,
causing the gear and the pickup roller
gear to engage.
Cassette pickup rollers
Pickup clutch
SL5
Copy paper
Figure 5-104 (Single-feeder type)
5-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3.
Re-Pickup (cassette pickup)
If the vertical path roller paper sensor (PS4) does not detect copy paper within a specific period
of time after the cassette pickup roller has started to rotate, the pickup roller is rotated once again to
execute pickup operation, thereby ensuring correct pickup (as for recycled paper).
If the vertical path roller paper sensor does not detect copy paper after re-pickup, the machine
will assume the absence of copy paper and will indicate “ ” in the count/ratio indicator in the
control panel. (This mechanism substitutes a paper detecting mechanism.)
Copy Start key
ON
STBY
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
Main motor (M1)
0.7sec (approx.)
Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)
Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)
Vertical path roller paper
sensor (PS4)
II
I
I : Re-pickup operation is executed if the vertical path roller paper sensor (PS4) does not detect
copy paper within 0.5 sec after the pickup clutch solenoid (SL1) has turned don.
II : The cassette pickup solenoid (SL5) turns on once again about 1.3 sec after the pickup clutch
solenoid (SL1) turns on.
Figure 5-105
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-5
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
4.
Controlling the Multifeeder Pickup Roller
The multifeeder pickup roller is controlled by a spring clutch, control ring, pickup clutch solenoid (SL1), gear unit, and multifeeder pickup solenoid (SL4).
When the multifeeder pickup solenoid (SL4) turns on, the drive of the main motor (M1)
reaches the cam gear. When the cam gear starts to rotate in response, the lifter, which is in contact
with the cam, moves up the gear unit and, at the same time, pushes down the paper guide plate. The
cam gear makes a 180° turn (approximate), and stops at the toothless section.
When the pickup solenoid turns on in this condition, the claw leaves the control ring, and the
drive of the main motor (M1) reaches the multifeeder pickup roller.
When the multifeeder pickup roller rotates, paper is picked up and sent as far as the registration
roller, which controls the paper so that its leading edge will match the leading edge of the image on
the photosensitive drum.
M1
Pickup clutch
solenoid drive
signal (PUSLD*)
Multifeeder pickup
solenoid drive
signal (MFSLD*)
DC controller PCB
Paper guide
plate
SL1
SL4
Cam gear
Copy paper
Multifeeder pickup roller
Spring clutch
Control ring
Claw
Lifter
Cam gear
Paper guide plate
Toothless section
The cam gear makes a 180˚ turn (approximate),
causing the paper guide plate to move up and down.
Figure 5-106
5-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
5.
Controlling the Single-feeder Pickup Roller
The single-feeder pickup roller is controlled by the pickup clutch solenoid (SL1) and the
single-feeder paper sensor (PS5).
When copy paper is inserted into the single-feeder, the single-feeder paper sensor turns on and
the main motor starts to rotate. The drive of the main motor reaches the signal feeder pickup roller
through a gear.
When the single-feeder pickup roller starts to rotate, copy paper is picked up from the signal
feeder and is sent as far as the registration roller, which controls the paper so that its leading edge
will match the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum.
M1
SL1
Single-feeder paper detection
signal (SFPD)
DC controller PCB
Single-feeder
paper sensor
PS5
Copy paper
Single-feeder Pickup roller
Pickup clutch
Figure 5-107
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-7
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
6.
Controlling the Copying Speed in Multifeeder Mode
The machine does not possess a copy paper width detecting function and, therefore, the temperature of the ends of the fixing assembly increases when copies are made continuously on paper
narrower than A4/LTR.
When the multifeeder is used for continuous copying, a delay is initiated after picking up the
19th sheet so as to increase the sheet-to-sheet distance for the sheets that follow, controlling the
copying speed to 9 cpm.
If the copying speed is controlled (to 6 cpm) by a mechanism to prevent overheating of the
copyboard, this control will not be executed, and moreover if the temperature of the copyboard
increases during 9-cpm control, 6-cpm control will be initiated.
Switching to 9-cpm copying speed
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
Main motor (M1)
19th copy
Delivery sensor (PS3)
I
Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)
Pre-registration roller
paper sensor (Q751)
I:
A switch to 9-cpm copying mode is made after delivering the 19th copy in a continuous
copying job.
Figure 5-108
5-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
C.
Controlling the Movement of Paper
1.
Controlling the Registration Roller
The registration roller is controlled by a spring clutch, control ring, pre-registration roller paper
sensor (Q751), and registration clutch solenoid (SL2).
The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB turns on the registration clutch solenoid at a
specific timing in response to the paper detection signal from the pre-registration roller paper sensor. When the registration clutch solenoid turns on, the claw will leave the control ring, and the
drive of the main motor will reach the registration roller to move the copy paper to the photosensitive drum.
Spring clutch
Control ring
Registration roller
Paper detecting lever
M1
Copy paper
Claw
Registration clutch solenoid drive signal
(RGSLD*)
SL2
Preregistration
roller
paper
sensor
(Q751)
Pre-registration roller paper detection signal (RPD)
DC controller PCB
Figure 5-109
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-9
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
2.
a.
Pickup/Feeding Timing Chart
Pickup from the Cassette (A4, 2 copies)
Copy Start key
ON
STBY INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)
0.1sec (approx.)
Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)
Vertical path roller
paper sensor (PS4)
Pre-registration roller
paper sensor (Q751)
II
I
Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)
0.3sec (approx.)
0.7sec (approx.)
Delivery sensor (PS3)
Forward
Scanner
Reverse
Figure 5-110
b.
Pickup from the Single-feeder (A4, 1 copy)
Copy paper in
ON
STBY
INTR
SCFW
SCRV LSTR
STBY
Main motor (M1)
Single-feeder paper sensor (PS5)
0.3sec (approx)
Pre-registration roller
paper sensor (Q751)
II
I
Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)
Delivery sensor (PS3)
Forward
Scanner
Reverse
Figure 5-111
5-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
c.
Pickup from the Multifeeder (A4, 2 copies)
Copy Start key
ON
STBY INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV LSTR
STBY
Main motor (M1)
Multifeeder pickup solenoid (SL4)
Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)
Pre-registration roller
paper sensor (Q751)
Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)
Delivery sensor (PS3)
Scanner
1sec 0.1sec(approx.)
II
I
0.3sec (approx.)
0.7sec (approx.)
Forward
Reverse
I : Varied by value under ‘30’ of service mode (registration adjustment).
II : Used for measuring the length of copy paper.
length of copy paper (mm) = 96 (mm/s) × II (s) + 11 (mm) -10 (mm)
96 (mm/s) : speed at which copy paper is moved.
11 (mm) : distance between pre-registration roller paper sensor and registration roller.
10 (mm) : length of actuator of the pre-registration roller paper sensor.
Figure 5-112
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-11
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
D.
Detecting Jams
The machine is equipped with four paper sensors used to find out the presence/absence of copy
paper and whether copy paper is moving properly.
• Vertical path roller paper sensor (PS4)
• Single-feeder paper sensor (PS5)
• Pre-registration roller paper sensor (Q751)
• Delivery sensor (PS3)
The presence/absence of a jam is checked with reference to the presence/absence of paper over
a specific sensor at such times as programmed in the microprocessor.
The machine is not equipped with a function which remembers the remaining number of copies to make at time of a jam and the selected copying mode; in other words, it will be reset to
standard mode when it is opened and closed for the removal of the jam.
The microprocessor possesses the following eight types of no paper/jam detection sequence; if
any of its sensors detects copy paper at power-on, the machine will identify the condition as a jam.
Multifeeder pickup roller
Photosensitive drum
Registration roller
Delivery roller
PS3
Fixing assembly
Q751
Cassette pickup
roller
Cassette
PS4
Vertical
path roller
Figure 5-113 (Multifeeder type)
Single-feeder
pickup roller
Photosensitive drum
Registration roller
Delivery roller
PS3
Fixing assembly
Cassette
Q751
Cassette pickup
roller
PS5
PS4
Vertical
path roller
Figure 5-114 (Single-feeder type)
5-12
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
1.
Multifeeder Pickup Assembly (no paper, pickup delay jam)
If copy paper does not reach the pre-registration roller paper sensor within a specific period of
time in multifeeder mode, the condition will be identified as the absence of paper; the machine will
stop the main motor in about 1.5 sec, and indicate the Add Paper message.
If the pre-registration roller paper sensor detects copy paper during this 1.5 sec period (approximate), the machine will identify the condition as a pickup delay jam, and flash the Jam indicator.
Copy Start key
ON
STBY
INTR
SCFW
Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)
2.6sec
Jam check
Pre-registration roller paper
sensor (Q751)
Normal
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-115 (normal)
Copy Start key
P indication
ON
STBY
INTR
SCFW
Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)
Jam check
Pre-registration roller paper
sensor (Q751)
2.6sec
No paper
1.5sec
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-116 (no paper)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-13
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
Copy Start key
ON
STBY
indication
INTR
SCFW
Pickup clutch solenoid (SL1)
2.6sec
Jam check
Pre-registration roller paper
sensor (Q751)
No paper
Jam
1.5sec
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-117 (jam)
2.
Absence of Paper in the Cassette Pickup Assembly
When re-pickup operation is executed (from the cassette) , the absence of paper will be identified if copy paper doesnot reach the vertical path roller paper sensor within a specific period of
time. In responce, the machine will stop the main motor in about 1.5 sec, and indicate the Add
Paper message.
Copy Start key
ON
STBY
INTR
P indication
SCFW
Re-pickup
Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)
Jam check
Vertical path roller
paper sensor (PS4)
1.2sec
1.2sec
Normal
1.2sec
No paper
1.5sec
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-118
5-14
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3.
Single-feeder Pickup Delay Jam
After being detected by the single-feeder paper sensor, if copy paper does not reach the preregistration roller sensor within a specific period of time, the machine will identify the condition as
a single feed pickup delay jam, stop the operation immediately, and flash the Jam indicator.
Copy paper inserted
STBY
INTR
SCFW
Single-feeder paper sensor (PS5)
5.1 sec
Jam check
Pre-registration roller paper
sensor (Q751)
Jam
1.5 sec
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-119
4.
Vertical Path Stationary Jam
If copy paper fails to move past the vertical path roller paper sensor within a specific period of
time because of faulty feeding, the machine will identify the condition as a vertical path stationary
jam, stop the operation, and flash the Jam indicator.
indication
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
Cassette pickup solenoid (SL5)
Jam check
Vertical path roller
paper sensor (PS4)
0.5sec
Normal
0.5sec
Jam
1.5sec
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-120
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-15
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
5.
Registration Paper Delay Jam
After reaching the vertical path roller paper sensor, if copy paper fails to reach the pre-registration roller paper sensor within a specific period of time, the machine will identify the condition as
a registration paper delay jam, stop the operation immediately, and flash the Jam indicator.
indication
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
Vertical path roller
paper sensor (PS4)
2.6sec
Jam check
Pre-registration roller
paper sensor (Q751)
2.6sec
Normal
Jam
1.5sec
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-121
6.
Registration Paper Stationary Jam
If copy paper does not move past the pre-registration roller paper sensor within a specific
period of time because of feeding faults, the machine will identify the condition as a registration
paper stationary jam, stop the operation immediately, and flash the Jam indicator.
Copy Start key
ON
STBY
INTR
indication
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)
4.6sec
Jam check
Pre-registration roller
paper sensor (Q751)
4.6sec
Normal
Jam
1.5sec
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-122
5-16
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
7.
Delivery Delay Jam
If copy paper does not reach the delivery sensor within a specific period of time because of
feeding faults, the machine will identify the condition as a delivery delay jam, stop the operation
immediately, and flash the Jam indicator.
Copy Start key
ON
STBY
indication
INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
Registration clutch solenoid (SL2)
4.1sec
Jam check
4.1sec
normal
Delivery sensor (PS3)
Jam
1.5sec
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-123
8.
Delivery Stationary Jam
If copy paper does not move past the delivery sensor within a specific period of time because of
feeding faults, the machine will identify the condition as a delivery stationary jam, stop the operation immediately, and flash the Jam indicator.
indication
SCFW
Jam check
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
4.1sec
4.1sec
Normal
Delivery sensor (PS3)
SCFW
Jam
1.5sec
Main motor (M1)
Figure 5-124
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-17
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:
1. ! Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for
safety.
2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble
it.
3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and Varistors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)
5. As necessary, cut the harnessband.
6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.
7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any
screws indiscriminately.
5-18
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
A.
Pickup Assembly
1. Removing the Pickup Roller
1) Pull out the cassette.
2) Remove the front lower cover.
(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing the
Front Lower Cover.”)
3) Open the machines' top unit farther, and
hold it in place with the handle of a screwdriver (about 30 mm in diameter).
Figure 5-201
4) Remove the screw [1], and free the two
claws [2]; then, detach the feeding assembly cover [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
Figure 5-202
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-19
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
5) While pulling the guide plate [4] of the
cassette pickup solenoid in the direction
of the arrow, turn the gear [5] slightly in
the direction of the arrow to disengage the
guide plate [4] and the gear [6].
[5]
[6]
[4]
Figure 5-203
6) While pulling the plunger [7] of the
pickup solenoid, turn the gear [8] in the
direction of the arrow so that the pickup
roller [9] is oriented as shown.
[7]
[9]
[8]
Figure 5-204
5-20
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
7) Using a hex wrench or the like, push the
hook [10] of the pickup roller through the
hole to remove the pickup roller [11].
Hex wrench
[10]
Caution:
When removing the pickup roller, be
sure to push the claw while holding the
shaft in place so as to prevent the pickup
roller shaft from freeing itself.
Pickup roller shaft
[11]
Figure 5-205
Caution:
When mounting the multifeeder unit,
perform the next steps first:
1) Turn on the power switch; then, select the multifeeder, and press the
Copy Start key.
2) When the pickup gear unit has moved
up as far as it can, turn off the power
switch.
3) Mount the multifeeder; then, make a
copy using the multifeeder.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Pickup gear unit
Figure 5-206
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-21
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
2. Removing the Pickup Clutch
2.1 Removing the Pickup Clutch (singlefeeder type)
1) Remove the front lower cover.
(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing the
Front Lower Cover.”)
2) Remove the registration roller unit.
(See E.1.“Removing the Registration
Roller Unit.”)
3) Open the machine’s top unit, and hold it in
place using the handle of a screwdriver
(about 30 mm in diameter).
Figure 5-207
4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove
the screw [2]; then, detach the solenoid
unit [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
Figure 5-208
5-22
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
5) Remove the screw [4] and the two claws
[5], and detach the gear unit [6].
[6]
[5]
[4]
[5]
Figure 5-209
[6]
6) Free the claw [7] of the gear unit [6], and
detach the clutch unit [8].
[7]
[8]
Figure 5-210
[11]
7) Remove the E-ring [9] and the washer
[10], and detach the pickup clutch [11].
[10]
[9]
Figure 5-211
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-23
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
2.2 Removing the Pickup Clutch
(multifeeder type)
1) Remove the front lower cover.
(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing the
Front Lower Cover.”)
2) Remove the registration roller unit.
(See E.1.“Removing the Registration
Roller Unit.”)
3) Open the machine’s top unit farther, and
hold it in place with the handle of a screwdriver (about 30 mm in diameter).
Figure 5-212
4) Disconnect the two connectors [1], and
remove the two screws [2] then, detach
the solenoid unit [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
Figure 5-213
5-24
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
5) While freeing the two claws [4], remove
the pickup clutch unit [5].
[4]
[5]
[4]
Figure 5-214
6) Remove the E-ring [6], and detach the
pickup clutch [7].
[7]
[6]
Figure 5-215
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-25
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3. Removing the Vertical Path Roller
1) Remove the front lower cover.
(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing the
Front Lower Cover.”)
2) Open the machine’s top unit farther, and
hold it using the handle of a screwdriver
(about 30 mm in diameter).
Figure 5-216
3) Remove the screw [1], and free the two
claws [2]; then, detach the feeding assembly cover [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
Figure 5-217
5-26
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
4) While lifting the sensor lever [4], remove
the vertical path roller [5].
[5]
[4]
Figure 5-218
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-27
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
B.
Multifeeder Assembly
1. Removing the Multifeeder Unit
1) Open the right door.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the multifeeder unit [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
Figure 5-219
Caution:
When mounting the multifeeder unit,
perform the following first:
1) Turn on the power switch; then, select the multifeeder, and press the
Copy Start key.
2) When the pickup gear unit has moved
as far as it can, turn off the power
switch.
3) Mount the multifeeder unit; then,
make a copy using the multifeeder.
5-28
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Pickup
gear unit
Figure 5-220
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
2.
Removing the Multifeeder Pickup
Roller
1) Remove the multifeeder unit.
(See 1. “Removing the Multifeeder
Unit.”)
2) Free the claw [1], and remove the gear [2]
and the bushing [3].
[2] [1]
[1] [3]
Figure 5-221
3) Remove the multifeeder pickup roller unit
[4].
[4]
Figure 5-222
4) While freeing the claw [5], detach the
multifeeder pickup roller [6].
[6]
[5]
Figure 5-223
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-29
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
3. Removing the Separation Pad
1) Remove the multifeeder pickup roller together with its shaft.
(See 2. “Removing the Multifeeder
Pickup Roller.”)
2) Remove the multifeeder tray.
3) Slide the side guide [1] to the inside about
3 cm, and free the two claws [2]; then, detach the holding plate [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
Figure 5-224
4) Push up the separation pad [4], and pull it
out by pushing the shaft [5] toward the inside.
[5]
[4]
[5]
Figure 5-225
5-30
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
C.
Single-feeder Assembly
[2]
1. Removing the Single-feeder Unit
1) Open the right door.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and remove
the single-feeder unit [2].
[1]
[1]
Figure 5-226
2.
Removing the Single-feeder
Pickup Roller
1) Remove the single-feeder unit.
(See 1. “Removing the Single-feeder
Unit.”)
2) Push up the stopper lever [1], and move
the gear [2] of the single-feeder pickup
roller assembly in the direction of the arrow.
[1]
[2]
Figure 5-227
3) Remove the single-feeder pickup roller
assembly [4] together with the paper
guide plate [3].
[3]
[4]
Figure 5-228
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-31
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
4) Free the claw [5] of the paper guide plate
[3], and remove the single-feeder pickup
roller [6].
[6]
[5]
[3]
Figure 5-229
5-32
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
D.
Feeding Assembly
[2]
1. Detaching the Feed Belt
1) Open the machine’s top unit.
2) Push down the stopper [1], and remove
the gear [2].
[1]
Figure 5-230
3) While freeing the claw [3], detach the four
shafts [4]; then, detach the feed belt [5].
[3]
[4]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[3]
Figure 5-231
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-33
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
E.
Registration Roller
Assembly
1.
Removing the Registration Roller
Unit
1) Open the machine’s top unit.
2) Remove the spring [1] (front, rear).
[1]
[1]
Figure 5-232
3) Remove the two bushings [2] and remove
the registration roller lower unit [3].
[2]
[3]
[2]
Figure 5-233
5-34
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
2.
Removing the Registration Roller
Clutch
1) Remove the registration roller unit.
(See 1. “Removing the Registration
Roller Unit.”)
2) Remove the bushing [1] and the E-ring
[2].
[1]
[2]
Figure 5-234
3) While shifting down the registration roller
[3], detach it from the gear unit [4].
[4]
[3]
Figure 5-235
4) Remove the E-ring [5], and detach the
registration roller clutch [6].
Caution:
The clutch has a pin. Take care not to
lose it when removing the clutch.
[5]
[6]
Figure 5-236
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-35
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
F.
Delivery Assembly
1. Removing the Delivery Roller
1) Remove the fixing lower roller.
(See Chapter 6.II.A.3.“Removing the Fixing Lower Roller.”)
2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the side plate [2] and the four gears [3].
[3]
[3]
[2]
[1]
Figure 5-237
3) Remove the screw [4], and free the two
hooks [5]; then, detach the sensor holder
[6].
[5]
[6]
[4]
Figure 5-238
5-36
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM
4) Remove the two bushings [7].
[7]
Figure 5-239
5) While shifting the delivery lower guide
[8] toward the rear, detach the delivery
roller [9].
[8]
[9]
Figure 5-240
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
5-37
CHAPTER 6
FIXING SYSTEM
This chapter explains the principles used to fuse toner images to transfer medium in
view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of
operation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
I.
OPERATIONS ..............................6-1
A. Outline ...................................6-1
B. Controlling the Fixing
Temperature ..........................6-3
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
II.
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..... 6-10
A. Fixing Assembly ................. 6-11
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
I.
A.
OPERATIONS
Outline
The major functions of the fixing unit are as follows:
Item
Fixing method
SURF
Description
Fixing drive
Main Motor (M1)
Fixing heater
Flat heater
Fixing temperature
detection
Thermistor (TH1)
Cleaner
Cleaning roller
Protective functions
The following are used to detect and protect against
an error; upon detection, power to the fixing heater
will be cut:
• Thermistor (TH1)
• Thermal fuse (FU2; activating at 228°C)
Error code
E000
E001
E002
E003
The fixing temperature fails to increase.
The thermistor has detected overheating.
Fault in fixing power control.
The fixing temperature has dropped
abnormally.
Table 6-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-1
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
Thermal fuse 2 (FU2)
Fixing film
Fixing heater (H1)
Fixing thermistor (TH1)
Fixing lower roller
Cleaning roller
Figure 6-101
Fixing thermistor signal (TH1)
DC controller PCB
Fixing film
Fixing thermistor (TH1)
Thermal fuse 2 (FU2)
M1
Fixing heater (H1)
Main motor
Fixing lower roller
Cleaning roller
Composite power supply PCB
Figure 6-102
6-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
B.
Controlling the Fixing Temperature
1.
Outline
The fixing lower roller of the fixing assembly is driven by the main motor (M1). When the
fixing lower roller rotates, the film of the fixing upper unit starts to rotate in conjunction.
The fixing film is heated by the fixing heater (H1), which is a flat heater mounted in contact
with the inner side of the film. The fixing heater is equipped with a thermistor (TH1), which sends
the fixing thermistor signal (TH1) to the microprocessor (Q101) on the DC controller PCB; in
response, the microprocessor controls the fixing heater duty signal (HEAT_PWM) to vary the
power supplied to the heater by way of controlling the temperature of the fixing heater.
+5V
(Q101)
RLOFF*
Auxiliary
power supply Relay
drive signal
Relay
RL601
+5V
Thermal
fuse 2
FU2
Timer
circuit
Fixing
thermistor
TH1
HEAT_ERR*
Fixing heater
error signal
Fixing heater high
temperature
error detection circuit
MicroHEAT_OFF processor
Fixing heater
OFF signal
HEAT_PWM
Fixing heater
duty signal
Fixing heater
H1
Composite power
supply PCB
C123
HEAT_TRG
Fixing heater
drive signal
+
E0_DT
E0 detection signal
DC controller PCB
Figure 6-103
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-3
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
2.
Controlling the Temperature of the Fixing Heater
The temperature of the fixing heater is switched according to the following two parameters:
• Temperature of the fixing heater when the Copy Start key is pressed.
• Number of copies to make in continuous copying mode
Table 6-102 shows the temperature of the fixing heater when the Copy Start key is pressed (as
detected by the thermistor TH1) and the temperatures to which the fixing heater is controlled according to the number of copies made in continuous mode.
6-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
1
Heater temperature when the Copy
Start key is pressed
Less than 100°C
2
100°C or more and less than 120°C
3
120°C or more
Number of copies
Control temperature (°C)
1
2~9
10 ~ 29
30 ~ 39
40 ~ 49
50 ~ 59
60 ~
1~9
10 ~ 19
20 ~ 29
30 ~ 39
40 ~
1~9
10 ~ 19
20 ~
200
195
190
185
180
175
170
190
186
180
175
170
180
175
170
Table 6-102
Power switch
ON
Copy Start key
ON
STBY
Copy Start key
Copying end
Copying end ON
Copying
STBY
Copying
STBY
Main motor (M1)
Fixing heater (H1)
200
195
190
Controlling the
185
Temperature of
the Fixing Heater 180
( C)
120
100
1
10
30
40
1
11
21
Number of Copies in Continuous Copying Mode
after a Press on the Copy Start Key
Figure 6-104
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-5
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
3.
Controlling the Temperature Supplied to the Fixing Heater
The temperature of the fixing heater is controlled by controlling the power supplied to the
fixing heater, and the power to the fixing heater is controlled using a phase control method.
The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB controls the timing at which the fixing heater
duty signal (HEAT_PWM) is generated so that power suited to the target temperature of the fixing
heater may be supplied (phase control).
HEAT_PWM
Power supplied
to the heater
Figure 6-105
4.
Correcting the Variation in the Resistance of the Fixing Heater
The characteristics of the flat heater used as the fixing heater vary from heater to heater because
the production method. A discrepancy in resistance, if left alone, will not enable correct control of
the fixing heater.
The machine makes correction in relation to the selected level of resistance (from three settings), and corrects it basd on the readings obtained by the microprocessor.
Caution:
The level of resistance of the fixing heater is selected by an appropriate combination of the
jumper wires connected to the connector of the fixing thermistor (TH1) and the delivery
sensor (PS3).
The best level is selected at the factory when the fixing assembly is assembled. Do not change
the combination of jumper wires.
Figure 6-106
6-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
5.
Controlling the Power Supplied to the Fixing Heater between Sheets
When the copying speed is controlled to 6 cpm to prevent overheating of the copyboard, the
temperature of the fixing lower roller tends to increase because of the increased sheet-to-sheet
distance. To prevent possible problems, power to the fixing heater is stopped between sheets when
the copying speed is controlled to 6 cpm.
Switching to 6-cpm copying speed
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
Registration clutch
solenoid (SL2)
Heater OFF
Delivery sensor (PS3)
Fixing heater (H1)
Scanner
Heater ON
Forward
Reverse
Figure 6-107
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-7
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
6.
Protective Functions
The machine is equipped with the following protective functions to prevent malfunction of the
fixing heater.
a. Thermistor (TH1)
The microprocessor on the DC controller PCB monitors the voltage of the thermistor (TH1); if
an abnormally high or low temperature is detected, the microprocessor sends the fixing heater error
signal (HEAT_ERR*) to the timer circuit and, at the same time, indicate an error code (E000
through E003).
In response, the timer circuit sends the relay drive signal (RLOFF*) to the auxiliary power
supply in about 1.2 sec after it hs received the fixing heater error signal (HEAT_ERR*).
The auxiliary power supply turns off the relay (RL601) to turn off the power. Then, the data of
‘E0’ (associated with the heater) is retained so as to indicate ‘E0’ when the power is turned on the
next time.
‘E0’ is backed up for about 5 min. After ‘E000’ through ‘E003’ is indicated in the control panel
and the power is turned off, the machine will indicate ‘E0’ in the control panel if the power switch
is turned on within 5 min, not recognizing a press on the Copy Start key. If the Copy Start key is
pressed after about 5 min, however, a press on the Copy Start key will be recognized.
If an error is detected in relation to the heater during copying operation, the machine will
indicate ‘E000’ through ‘E003’ in the control panel once again and turn off the power.
Related Error Code
E000
• The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is not 65°C in 1.5 sec after the Copy
Start key is pressed.
• The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is not 150°C in 4 sec after the Copy
Start key is pressed.
E001
• The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is 230°C or more.
• The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is higher than the control temperature
by 30°C or more.
• The thermistor (TH1) has detected an increase in temperature of 100°C or more in 1 sec.
• The thermistor (TH1) has detected an increase in temperature of 40°C or more after it
detected 100°C in standby state.
• E0 detection signal (E0_DT) has been detected twice in succession.
E002
The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is 150°C or higher and, thereafter, maximum power has been supplied to the fixing heater for 10 to 14 sec during copying operation.
E003
The temperature detected by the thermistor (TH1) is 160°C and then 150°C or lower during
copying operation.
6-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
b.
Thermal Fuse (FU2)
If the temperature around the thermal fuse exceeds 228°C and remains so for a specific period
of time, the thermal fuse will blow to cut the power to the fixing heater.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-9
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:
1. ! Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for
safety.
2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble
it.
3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and Varistors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)
5. As necessary, cut the harness band.
6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.
7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any
screws indiscriminately.
6-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
A.
1.
Fixing Assembly
Construction
Caution:
1. The fixing film is made from a special material. Do not touch it or subject it to dust.
2. The machine does not have a mechanism used to adjust the roller pressure.
[1]
[5]
[1] Fixing heater
[2] Fixing film
[3] Inlet guide
[4]
[2]
[3]
[4] Fixing lower roller
[5] Cleaning roller
Figure 6-201
2. Removing the Fixing Assembly
1) Remove the front lower cover.
(See Chapter 7.III.A.2.“Removing the
Front Lower Cover.”)
2) Remove the screw [1], and free the two
hooks [2]; then, detach the power supply
cover [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
Figure 6-202
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-11
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
3) Remove the screw [4], and disconnect the
connector [5].
[5]
[4]
Figure 6-203
4) Remove the two screws [6], and disconnect the connector [7]; then, detach the
fixing assembly [8] by turning it in the direction of the arrow.
[6]
[8]
[7]
Figure 6-204
6-12
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
3. Removing the Fixing Lower Roller
1) Remove the fixing assembly.
(See 2. “Removing the Fixing Assembly.”)
2) Remove the two screws [1], and free the
two hooks [2]; then, detach the fixing upper stay [3] by turning it in the direction of
the arrow.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
Figure 6-205
3) Detach the harness band [4] from the side
plate, and remove the fixing upper unit
[5].
[5]
Caution:
Do not disassemble the fixing film and
the fixing heater. They cannot be replaced on their own.
[4]
Figure 6-206
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
6-13
CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM
4) Remove the fixing lower roller [6] together with the gear.
[6]
Figure 6-207
4. Removing the Cleaning Roller
1) Remove the fixing lower roller.
(See 3. “Removing the Fixing Lower
Roller.”)
2) Remove the cleaning roller [1] together
with the bushing.
[1]
Figure 6-208
6-14
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7
EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
This chapter shows the machine's external parts, and explains the principles used for
the machine's various control mechanisms in view of the functions of electrical and
mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows how these units
may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.
I.
II.
FANS ............................................7-1
POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM .........7-3
A. Outline of the Power Supply
System ..................................7-3
B. Power Supply Circuit .............7-4
C. Detecting an Error on
the Composite Power Supply
PCB .......................................7-6
D. Protecting the Power Supply
Circuit ....................................7-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ........7-7
A. External Covers .....................7-8
B. Control Panel...................... 7-15
C. Copyboard Glass ............... 7-16
D. Main Motor/Main Drive
Assembly ............................ 7-17
E. Electrical System ............... 7-21
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
I. FANS
The machine is equipped with two fans serving to discharge ozone or cool its inside.
The heat exhaust fan is driven directly by the main motor (M1; through a belt and a gear), and
is designed to rotate at all times while the main motor is rotating.
Heat exhausting fan
FM1
Figure 7-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-1
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
The scanner cooling fan (FM1) is turned on and off according to the temperature detected by
the scanner thermistor (TH2).
If the reading by the thermistor is 37.5°C or higher and the copying speed reaches 6 cpm, the
fan starts to rotate. If the reading is lower than 37.5°C, on the other hand, the fan will not rotate if
no more than one copy is made or while making the first copy of a continuous copying job. (It
rotates when making the second and subsequent copies of a continuous copying job.)
Power switch
ON
Copy Start key
ON
STBY INTR
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV LSTR STBY
Main motor (M1)
I
Scanner cooling fan (FM1)
Heat exhausting fan
Forward
Scanner
I:
Reverse
If 6-cpm copying speed control is executed starting with the first copy, the fan will rotate.
Figure 7-102
7-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
II. POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
A.
Outline of the Power Supply System
Door switch
Composite power
supply circuit
Noise
filter
circuit
DS1
Power
plug
Transformer
Relay
RL601
Auxiliary
power
supply
circuit
T600
+5V
+5V
Microprocessor
(Q900)
FU102
+24VR
+5V
To ADF
+24VU
DC
controller
PCB +24VU
+5V
DC
power
supply
circuit
Main
transformer
T101
+24VU
+24VU
+24VU
+24VR
Control panel
AE sensor
Sensor
Solenoid
Scanner/lens
drive motor (M2)
Scanner cooling fan
Blanking lamp
+24VU Main motor/
main motor
driver PCB
M1
Fixing
heater
control
circuit
Fixing heater
Scanning
lamp
control
circuit
Scanning lamp
Highvoltage
power
supply
circuit
Primary charging
roller
Developing roller
Transfer roller
Static eliminator
Figure 7-201
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-3
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
B.
Power Supply Circuit
The machine’s power supply consists of a composite power supply circuit in which a DC
power supply, scanning lamp power supply, and high-voltage power supply are integrated on a
single board. It also possesses a microprocessor for exchanges of various data with the machine's
DC controller PCB.
The machine’s power switch is a soft switch, and the machine is equipped with an auxiliary
power supply used to operate the switch. The auxiliary power supply provides the microprocessor
(Q900) with +5 V as long as the door switch (DS1) remains on.
AC power is supplied to the DC power supply when the power switch on the control panel is
turned on. In response, the DC power supply provides the DC controller PCB with +5 V, +24 VR,
and +24 VU.
When the power switch is turned off, the power to the DC controller PCB is cut off. To back it
up against ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, and ‘E003’, the machine is equipped with a DC capacitor as part
of the DC controller circuit.
When ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, or ‘E003’ occurs, the capacitor (C123) collects electric charge;
if charge exists in the capacitor while the power switch is on, the machine indicates ‘E0’ on the
control panel to indicate that an error related to the fixing heater has occurred.
Note:
The backup capacitor (C123) retains electric charge for about 5 min after the power switch is
turned off.
Reference:
The tolerances in DC voltage are as follows:
• +5 V ±5%
• +24 VR ±5%
• +24 VU -10.0%, +12.5%
For +24 VR, two types of voltage are used:
• During copying, +24 V ±5%
• During standby, +18 V ±10%
However, the above assume that the deviations in AC input are -15%, +10%.
7-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
Door switch
DS1
Relay
RL601
FU102
Auxiliary
power
supply
Main
transformer
T101
DC
power
supply
+5V
+24VR
+24VU
+5V
Microprocessor
(Q900)
Power
switch
SW309
+
C123
Control panel
DC controller PCB
Power supply
Figure 7-202
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-5
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
C.
Detecting an Error on the Composite Power Supply PCB
The machine’s composite power supply PCB is equipped with a self diagnostic function to
check each power output and the communication with the DC controller PCB using the microprocessor (Q900) mounted on it.
If any of the following errors occurs, the microprocessor will exchange signals with the DC
controller PCB, and will indicate the result of self diagnosis on the control panel.
1.
Detecting an Over-Current in the Low-Voltage System
If an over-current is detected because of a fault in a DC load, the composite power supply PCB
will turn off the relay (RL601) to cut the AC input.
2.
Detecting a Fault in the High-Voltage Control Value
If a deviation is found between the setting value and the actual value is detected in any of the
following voltages, the composite power supply will indicate ‘E064’ on the control panel.
• Primary charging DC bias
• Developing DC bias
• Transfer bias
3.
Detecting a Fault in the Low-Voltage Control Value
If a deviation is detected between the setting value and the actual control value in +24 V (DC
output), the composite power supply PCB will indicate ‘E803’ on the control panel.
4.
Fault in the Communication with the DC Controller
If the DC controller PCB detects a fault in the communication with the composite power supply PCB, ‘E240’ will be indicated on the control panel for about 4 sec, and then the relay (RL601)
will be turned off to cut the AC input.
D.
Protecting the Power Supply Circuit
The composite power supply PCB is equipped with an over-current detection function which
turns on a protective mechanism to stop output if a load suffers a short-circuit.
If the output has stopped, it may be reset by opening the machine’s top unit, correcting the load,
and then turning the power switch back on.
Keep in mind, however, that repeated short-circuiting and resetting can blow the fuse (FU102).
7-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
III. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:
1. ! Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for
safety.
2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble
it.
3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and Varistors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)
5. As necessary, cut the harness band.
6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.
7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any
screws indiscriminately.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-7
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
A.
External Covers
For instructions on how to remove the
ADF, see Chapter 8.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Copyboard cover
Top cover
Control panel
Front lower cover
[5]
[5] Cassette
[6] Front upper cover
[7] Left cover
Figure 7-301 (Copyboard type)
7-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
ADF
Top cover
Control panel
Front lower cover
[5] Cassette
[6] Front upper cover
[7] Left cover
Figure 7-302 (ADF type)
Note:
Remove the covers as necessary when
cleaning, inspecting, or repairing the inside of the machine.
Those covers that may be detached from
their own by mere removal of mounting
screws are omitted from the discussions.
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1] Rear cover
[2] Right door
[3] Multifeeder unit
Figure 7-303
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-9
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
1. Removing the Top Cover
1) Remove the copyboard cover or the ADF.
2) Open the machine’s top unit.
3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the front upper cover [2].
[1]
Caution:
A flexible cable for the control panel is
connected to the front upper cover. Disconnect the cable from the DC controller.
[2]
[1]
Figure 7-304
4) Free the two claws [3], and slide the left
cover [4] to detach.
[4]
[3]
[3]
Figure 7-305
7-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
5) Remove the screw [5], and free the four
claws [6]; then, detach the rear cover [7].
[7]
[6]
[5]
Figure 7-306
6) Remove the screw [8], and detach the
copyboard cover foot retainer [9].
[8]
[9]
Figure 7-307
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-11
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
7) Free the two claw [10]; then lift the top
cover [11] to detach.
[10]
[10]
[11]
Figure 7-308
7-12
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
2. Removing the Front Lower Cover
1) Open the right door.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the multifeeder unit [2] (or the singlefeeder unit).
[1]
[2]
[1]
Figure 7-309
3) Open the machine’s top unit.
4) Remove the two screws [3], and detach
the front upper cover [4].
[3]
Caution:
A flexible cable for the control panel is
connected to the front upper cover. Disconnect the cable from the DC controller.
[4]
[3]
Figure 7-310
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-13
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
5) Remove the two screws [5] from the
screw plate found at the bottom of the machine.
[5]
Figure 7-311
6) While freeing the five claws [6], detach
the front lower cover [7].
[6]
[7]
[6]
Figure 7-312
Caution:
When mounting the multifeeder unit, be
sure to perform the following first:
1) Turn on the power switch; then, select the multifeeder as the source of
paper, and press the Copy Start key.
2) When the pickup gear unit assembly
has moved to its upper limit, turn off
the power switch.
3) Mount the multifeeder, and make one
copy using it as the source of paper.
Pickup
gear unit
Figure 7-313
7-14
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
B.
Control Panel
1. Removing the Control Panel
1) Open the machine’s top unit.
2) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the front upper cover [2].
[1]
Caution:
A flexible cable for the control panel is
connected to the front upper cover. Disconnect the cable from the DC controller.
[2]
[1]
Figure 7-314
3) Free the claw [3], and remove the power
supply switch assembly [4]. Move the
copy density adjusting lever [5] to the farthest right, and free the four claws [6];
then, detach the control panel [7].
[6]
[4]
Move to the right
Lighter
Darker
[3]
Auto Exposure
Manual Exposure
Photo
Timer Saver
[7]
[5]
Figure 7-315
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-15
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
C.
Copyboard Glass
1. Removing the Copyboard Glass
1) Remove the top cover. (See A.1. “Removing the Top Cover.”)
2) Close the machine’s top unit.
3) Remove the two screws [1], and detach
the two support plates [2]; then, detach the
copyboard glass [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
Figure 7-316
Note:
When mounting the copyboard glass, be
sure that the grounding plate is on the
side of its top edge. (ADF type only)
Copyboard glass
Grounding plate
Figure 7-317
7-16
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
D.
Main Motor/Main Drive
Assembly
1. Removing the Main Motor Unit
1) Remove the drum cartridge.
2) Remove the composite power supply
PCB.
(See E.2. “Removing the Composite
Power Supply PCB.”)
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the
high-voltage PCB [2].
[1]
[2]
Figure 7-318
4) Remove the insulating sheet [3].
[3]
Figure 7-319
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-17
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
5) Detach the fan belt [4].
[4]
Figure 7-320
6) Remove the four screws [5], and detach
the main motor unit [6].
[5]
Caution:
When installing the main motor unit, be
sure to attach the fan belt.
After attaching the fan belt, make sure
that the belt is free of twists.
[6]
[5]
Figure 7-321
7-18
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
2.
Removing the Main Drive Assembly
1) Remove the drum cartridge.
2) Remove the composite power supply
PCB.
(See E.2. “Removing the Composite
Power Supply PCB.”)
3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the
high-voltage PCB [2].
[1]
[2]
Figure 7-322
4) Remove the insulating sheet [3].
[3]
Figure 7-323
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-19
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
5) Detach the fan belt [4].
[4]
Figure 7-324
6) Remove the five screws [5], and detach
the main drive assembly [6].
[6]
[5]
Caution:
When installing the main drive assembly, be sure to attach the fan belt.
After attaching the fan belt, make sure
that the belt is free of twists.
[5]
Figure 7-325
7-20
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
E.
Electrical System
1. Removing the DC Controller PCB
1) Open the machine’s top unit.
2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the
front upper cover [2].
[1]
Caution:
A flexible cable for the control panel is
connected to the front upper cover. Disconnect the cable from the DC controller.
[2]
[1]
Figure 7-326
3) Disconnect all connectors from the DC
controller PCB, remove the screw [3], and
free the six claws [4]; then, detach the DC
controller PCB [5].
[3]
[4]
[5]
[4]
[4]
Figure 7-327
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-21
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
2.
Removing the Composite Power
Supply PCB
1) Remove the copyboard cover or the ADF.
2) Remove the left cover and the rear cover.
3) Remove the screw [1], and remove the
copyboard cover foot retainer [2].
[1]
[2]
Figure 7-328
4) Disconnect the ten connectors [3] from
the composite power supply PCB, and
disconnect the connector [4] from the
main motor assembly.
[3]
[3]
[3]
[4]
Figure 7-329
7-22
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
5) Remove the seven screws [5], and free the
five claws [6]; then, detach the composite
power supply PCB [7].
[6]
[5]
[5]
[7]
[5]
Figure 7-330
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
7-23
CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS
3.
Points to Note When Handling the
Composite Power Supply PCB
1) Some capacitors on the composite power
supply hold charges when the machine’s
power supply is off.
Take extra care never to short the terminals of the capacitor whenever you have
removed the composite power supply
PCB.
2) When handling the PCB, hold its heat radiating plate (at the center) or its both
edges. In particular, keep in mind that
” can
holding the area indicated by “
cause deformation or cracking of the
board.
Figure 7-331
7-24
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8
ADF
I.
ADF ..............................................8-1
A. Outline ...................................8-1
B Basic Construction ................8-2
C. Basic Operations ...................8-4
D. Detecting an Original ............8-6
E. Pickup Operation ...................8-8
F. Delivery .............................. 8-12
G. Controlling the Pickup
Motor .................................. 8-14
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
II.
H. Controlling the Belt Motor ..
I. Detecting Original Jams .....
J. Power Supply .....................
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .....
A. Removing the ADF .............
B. External Covers ..................
C. Drive System ......................
D. Feeding System .................
E. Electrical System ...............
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-15
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-21
8-23
8-26
8-33
CHAPTER 8 ADF
I. ADF
A.
Outline
The ADF picks up the originals stacked on the original tray starting with the topmost original,
moves them through the copyboard, and delivers them.
See Figure 8-101 for an outline of the feeding route.
Original tray
ADF
Copier
Figure 8-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-1
CHAPTER 8 ADF
B
Basic Construction
1.
Outline of the Electric Circuitry
The ADF’s major electrical mechanisms are controlled by the CPU on the ADF controller
PCB.
The CPU on the ADF controller PCB reads the signals from the sensors and the copier and
generates signals to drive the motor at such times as programmed in advance.
The copying modes selected on the copier are communicated to the ADF in serial, and the ADF
communicates to the copier the state of feeding originals to the copier in serial. (It does not use an
IC for communications.)
[Input block]
[Control block]
[Output block]
ADFcontroller PCB
Sensor
Switch
Motor
CPU
(Q1)
ROM
(Q2)
24V 5V
Serial communication
Composite
power
supply
PCB
Copier
Figure 8-102
8-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
2.
a.
Inputs to and Outputs from the ADF Controller PCB
Inputs to and Outputs from the ADF Controller PCB (1/1)
ADF controller PCB
+24V
ADF switch
J6-1
MS1
-2
ADFC
When ADF is opened, '1'.
+5V
J5-1
Delivery sensor
-3
-2
PI1
J105
Registration paper
sensor
PI2
PDP1
When original is detected, '1'.
(when light-blocking plate is at sensor)
+5V
J5-4
-6
-5
PDP2
When original is detected, '0'.
(when light-blocking plate is at sensor)
+5V
J5-7
Original placement
sensor
-9
-8
PI3
Belt motor
PDP3
When original is detected, '0'.
(when light-blocking plate is at sensor)
J3-1
-2
-3
-4
M1
See p. 8-15.
-5
Pickup motor
J3-6
M2
See p. 8-14.
-7
J114
J202
J2
Serial communication
Copier
*Negative logic.
Figure 8-103
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-3
CHAPTER 8 ADF
C.
Basic Operations
1.
Outline
The ADF uses two motors for picking up and delivering originals. The pickup motor (M2) is
used to pick up originals, and the belt motor (M1) is used to move, stop, and deliver originals.
Further, the ADF is equipped with three sensors for monitoring the movement of originals.
The ADF is designed to accommodate one-sided original copying mode only.
Pickup motor
drive signal
Belt motor
drive signal
Registration paper detection signal (PDP2) J5-6
Delivery paper detection signal (PDP1)
J5-3
Pick-up paper detection signal (PDP3) J5-9
ADF controller PCB
M1
M2
One-way
clutch
PI1
PI2
PI3
Figure 8-104
8-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
2.
One-Sided Original Mode
The ADF picks up originals stacked on the original tray starting with the topmost original; after
it picks up an original, it places it on the copyboard glass for copying, moves it away from the
copyboard glass, and delivers it to the copyboard glass.
Delivery tray
Originals
Original tray
Placing originals
Picking up an original
Feeding 1
Feeding 2
Copying
Delivering
Figure 8-105
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-5
CHAPTER 8 ADF
D.
Detecting an Original
1.
Outline
The ADF’s original detection mechanism has the following two functions:
1. Detecting the Presence/Absence of an Original
Checks whether there is an original on the original tray.
2. Identifying the Length of the Original
Checks the length of the original placed on the original tray.
3. Detecting the Presence/Absence of an Original
The original placement sensor (PI3) is used to check the presence/absence of an original.
When an original is placed on the original tray, the original placement sensor (PI3) sends the
original detection signal (PDP3) to the ADF controller PCB in response to the movement of the
detecting lever away from the sensor.
Original
Original tray
Detecting lever
Original detection
signal (PDP3)
PI3
ADF controller PCB
Figure 8-106
8-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
2.
Identifying the Length of the Original
The registration paper sensor (PI2) is used to identify the length of the original, if any.
The ADF controller computes the length of the original based on the time it takes for the
original to move past the registration paper sensor (PI2).
Using the result of the computation, the ADF controller determines whether the size of the
original is A4/LTR or smaller or LGL, thereby switching to the appropriate ADF operation.
Table 8-101 shows the lengths of originals that determines ADF operation sequence.
Registration paper
detection signal (PDP2)
Original
PI2
PI3
Original tray
ADF controller PCB
Figure 8-107
Original Lengths and Operation Sequences
Length
~313cm
314cm~
Sequence
For A4/LTR originals
For LGL originals
Table 8-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-7
CHAPTER 8 ADF
E.
Pickup Operation
1.
Operation
When an original is placed on the original tray and the Copy Start key is pressed, the following
sequence of operations takes place:
1
Preparing for PickUp Operation
When an original is placed on the original tray, i.e., the original placement sensor (PI3) turns
ON, the pickup roller rotates counterclockwise and the paper guide holds the original in place.
1st original
PI3
Original tray
Paper guide
Figure 8-108
2
Pickup Separation
When the Copy Start key is pressed, the pickup roller 1 and 2 rotate clockwise, and pick up the
first original (topmost) and forward it as far as the registration roller. (The separation pad ensures
that only one original is picked up.)
Pickup roller 1
Pickup roller 2
1st original
Separation pad
Registration roller
Figure 8-109
8-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
3
Arching
The first original is butted against the registration roller so that it arches.
1st original
Arching
Registration roller
Figure 8-110
4
Feeding Operation 1
The feeding belt is moved so that the leading edge of the first original comes into contact with
the delivery sensor (PI1). (In the case of a LGL original, the original is moved about 15 mm farther
after it has come into contact with the delivery sensor.)
At the same time, the pickup motor (M2) is rotated counterclockwise to prepare for picking up
the second original.
Delivery sensor
PI1
1st original
Feeding belt
Figure 8-111
2nd original
Original tray
PI3
Paper guide
Figure 8-112
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-9
CHAPTER 8 ADF
5
Feeding 2
The feeding belt is moved counterclockwise so that the first original is stopped at a specific
location on the copyboard glass.
Feeding belt
1st original
Figure 8-113
6
Moving the Scanner and Picking Up the Second Original
The scanner starts to move forward after the original has been stopped at a specific location on
the copyboard glass.
If the original is A4/LTR or smaller, the pickup motor (M2) is also rotated clockwise to pickup
the second original and butt it against the registration roller.
If the original is LGL, the second original is picked up after the scanner has been moved forward.
1st original
2nd original
Scanner
Figure 8-114
8-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
2.
Sequence of Pickup Operations (A4/LTR, 2 originals)
Original set
Copy Start key ON
Preparing for
pickup
Picking up
/separating
Pickig up
Feeding 1
Copying
Feeding 2
Picking up
2nd original
Preparing for pickup
of 2nd original
Arching
Pickup motor (M2)
Belt motor (M1)
Original detection
sensor (PI3)
Registration sensor (PI2)
Delivery sensor (PI1)
: motor CCW rotation
Figure 8-115
3.
Sequence of Operations (LGL, 2 originals)
Original set
Copy Start key ON
Preparing for
pickup
Picking up
/separating
Pickig up
Feeding 1
Arching
Copying
Feeding 2
Preparing for pickup
of 2nd original
Pickup motor (M2)
Belt motor (M1)
Original detection
sensor (PI3)
Registration sensor (PI2)
Feeding 15mm farther
Delivery sensor (PI1)
: motor CCW rotation
Figure 8-116
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-11
CHAPTER 8 ADF
F.
Delivery
1.
Operations
The ADF operates as follows to deliver originals from the copyboard glass:
1
Delivery Feeding
The feeding belt is moved to feed and deliver the first original on the copyboard glass. At the
same time, the pickup motor (M2) moves the second original to the copyboard glass.
1st original
2nd original
Figure 8-117
2
Delivering to the Delivery Tray
The ADF switches the belt motor to low speed as soon as the trailing edge of the original
moves past the delivery sensor (PI1), thereby delivering the original slowly.
1st original
Delivery sensor
Delivery tray
2nd original
Figure 8-118
8-12
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
2.
Sequence of Operations (A4/LTR, 2 originals)
Original set
Copy Start key ON
Picking up
/separating 1st original
Copying,picking
Delivering 1st original/
up/separating
picking up 2nd original
2nd original
Copying
Delivering
Pickup motor (M2)
Belt motor (M1)
Original detection
sensor (PI3)
Registration sensor (PI2)
Detecting length
Delivery sensor (PI1)
: motor CCW rotation
: motor low-speed rotation
Figure 8-119
3.
Sequence of Operations (LGL, 2 originals)
Original set
Copy Start key ON
Copying
Delivering 1st original,
picking up/separating
2nd original
Copying Delivering
Pickup motor (M2)
Belt motor (M1)
Original detection
sensor (PI3)
Registration sensor (PI2)
Delivery sensor (PI1)
Feeding farther 15mm Feeding farther 15mm
: motor CCW rotation
Feeding farther 15mm
: motor low-speed rotation
Figure 8-120
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-13
CHAPTER 8 ADF
G.
Controlling the Pickup Motor
1.
Outline
Figure 8-121 is a diagram of the control circuit for the pickup motor (M2).
The pickup motor is a DC motor.
The CPU (Q1) on the ADF controller PCB sends the motor drive signals PM0 and PM1 to the
motor driver (Q5). The pickup motor rotates clockwise or counterclockwise according to the combinations of the states of these two signals. (Table 8-102 shows how the pickup motor rotates for
each combination.)
The motor driver is equipped with a limiter function, preventing overcurrent from flowing into
the motor. When an overcurrent occurs, the limiter function cuts off the motor drive current,
thereby preventing damage to the motor.
When the limiter function is activated, the pickup motor cannot rotate as controlled, possibly
leading to pickup faults. Any pickup fault causes the ADF controller to flash the JAM indicator on
the copier and stop the pickup motor at the same time.
ADF controller PCB
+24V
Pickup
motor
Q1
PM1
Q5
Motor
driver
CPU
PM0
PMRD1
M2
PMRD1*
Figure 8-121
Motor drive
signal (PM0)
‘1’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
Motor drive
signal (PM1)
‘1’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
Pickup roller
rotation
Braked
Picking up
Delivering
At reset (free)
Table 8-102
8-14
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
H.
Controlling the Belt Motor
1.
Outline
Figure 8-122 is a diagram showing the control circuit for the belt motor (M2).
The belt motor is a 4-phase control stepping motor.
The CPU (Q1) on the ADF controller PCB sends control pulse signals (A, A*, B, B*) to the
motor driver (Q4).
In response, the motor driver changes the output timing of the pulse signals (MA, MA*, MB,
MB*) used for driving the motor to rotate the belt motor clockwise or counterclockwise.
The motor driver is equipped with a limiter function used to keep the motor supplied with a
specific current so that current greater than specified will not flow.
If loads large enough to activate the limiter function occur in succession, the belt motor cannot
rotate as specified, possibly leading to feeding faults. Any feeding fault will cause the ADF controller to flash the Jam indicator on the controller and stop the belt motor at the same time.
ADF controller PCB
Q1
A
CPU
+24V
MA
Q4
Motor
A*
Belt motor
driver
M1
MA*
MB
B
MB*
B*
Figure 8-122
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-15
CHAPTER 8 ADF
I.
Detecting Original Jams
The ADF is equipped with three jam sensors (PI1 through PI3) as indicated in Figure 8-123 to
monitor the movement of originals.
The movement of originals are checked at such times as programmed in the CPU on the ADF
controller PCB; a jam is identified in relation to the presence of an original at each sensor.
Table 8-103 describes the type of jam, condition of detection, and sensors involved.
PI1
PI1: delivery sensor
PI2: registration sensor
PI3
PI2
PI3: original placement sensor
Figure 8-123
Type of Original Jam and Condition of Detection
Operation
Pickup
Type of jam
Residual original
Sensor
PI1,PI2
Original present at start
PI1,PI2
Separation delay
PI2
Pick-up delay
PI2
ADF open
Delivery delay jam
MS1
PI1,PI2
Delivery stationary jam
PI1
Delivery
Conditions
When the 1st original is separated, the delivery
sensor (PI1) turns on while the belt motor
rotates for 300 ms or less or before the registration sensor (PI2) turns on.
When the 1st original is picked up, the registration sensor (PI2) and the delivery sensor (PI1)
turn on.
When separation starts, the registration sensor
(PI2) or the delivery sensor (PI1) are on.
When separation starts, the registration sensor
(PI2) does not turn on after 2 sec.
When pickup starts, the registration sensor (PI2)
does not turn off after feeding the original for
about 500 mm.
The ADF is opened while in operation.
When delivery starts, the delivery sensor (PI1)
does not detect an original that has been fed
about 100 mm.
After the registration sensor (PI2) has turned
off, the delivery sensor (PI1) does not detect an
original that has been fed for about 500 mm.
During pickup, the delivery sensor (PI1) remains on even when the original is fed for
‘length + about 60 mm’.
Table 8-103
8-16
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
J.
Power Supply
1.
Outline
Figure 8-124 shows the routes of power supply.
The ADF is supplied by the copier with 5 V and 24 V. The 24V supply is cut off when the ADF
is opened, i.e., when the ADF switch (MS1) turns off. The 5V supply will continue to keep each
sensor powered even when the ADF is opened.
NO
J6-2
J6-1 COM
ADF switch
(MS1)
Belt motor (M1)
J101-1 24V
J1-1
Pickup motor (M2)
Circuitbreaker
(CB1)
Composite
power
supply
PCB
Delivery sensor (PI1)
Fuse resistor
J101-3 5V
J1-3
Registration sensor (PI2)
(R1)
Logic
Original placement sensor (PI3)
Copier
ADF controller PCB
Figure 8-124
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-17
CHAPTER 8 ADF
II. DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
As needed, disassemble/assemble the machine with the following in mind:
1. ! Before starting the work, turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug for
safety.
2. Unless otherwise instructed, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble
it.
3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.
4. Use the washers where necessary. (The screws used to mount the grounding wire and Varistors come with a washer to ensure electrical continuity.)
5. As necessary, cut the harness band.
6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its part removed.
7. A few of the screws used are special screws (with wider thread intervals). Do not use any
screws indiscriminately.
8-18
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800S/900S REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
A.
Removing the ADF
1) Open the machine’s top unit.
2) Free the two claws [1], and slide the left
cover [2] to detach.
[2]
[1]
[1]
Figure 8-201
3) Remove the screw [3], and free the four
claws [4]; then, the detach the rear cover
[5].
[5]
[4]
[3]
Figure 8-202
4) Close the machine’s top unit.
5) Remove the two screws [6], and remove
the fixing plate [7].
[6]
[7]
Figure 8-203
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-19
CHAPTER 8 ADF
6) Disconnect the two connectors [8], and
remove the screw [9]; then, remove the
cable bush [10].
[10]
[8]
[9]
[8]
Figure 8-204
7) Remove the two lockpin [11], and remove
the ADF from the copier.
[11]
[11]
Figure 8-205
8-20
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
B.
External Covers
[1]
[2]
[1] Upper cover
[2] Lower cover
Figure 8-206
Remove the covers as follows when
cleaning, checking, or repairing the inside of
the machine:
1) Remove the ADF from the copier.
(See “A. Removing the ADF.”)
2) Remove the feeding roller [1] from the
bushing [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Figure 8-207
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-21
CHAPTER 8 ADF
3) Remove the six screws [3], and separate
the lower cover [4] from the upper cover
[5].
[3]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[5]
Figure 8-208
4) Disconnect the connector [6], and remove
the lower cover [4].
[4]
[6]
Figure 8-209
8-22
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
C.
Drive System
1. Drive Unit
1) Remove the lower cover.
(See “B. External Covers.”)
2) Remove the screw [1] and the bushing [2];
then, remove the pickup roller cover [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
Figure 8-210
3) Remove the E-ring [4], and remove the
bearing [5].
[5]
[4]
Figure 8-211
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-23
CHAPTER 8 ADF
4) Remove the timing belt [6], and remove
the feeding belt roller [7] by shifting it in
the direction of the arrow.
[6]
[7]
Figure 8-212
5) Remove the five screws [9], and remove
the right hinge unit [8].
[9]
[9]
[9]
Figure 8-213
6) Remove the stop ring [10] (resin) and the
bushing [11].
[11]
[10]
Figure 8-214
8-24
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
7) Disconnect the two connectors [12], and
remove the five screws [13]; then, remove
the drive unit [14].
[13]
[14]
[13]
[12]
Figure 8-215
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-25
CHAPTER 8 ADF
D.
Feeding System
1. Pickup Roller
1) Remove the drive unit [1].
(See “C.1. Drive Unit.”)
[1]
Figure 8-216
2) Remove the E-ring [2], and remove the
shaft [3]; then, detach the pickup roller 1
[4].
[4]
[3]
[2]
Figure 8-217
3) Remove the stop ring [5].
[5]
Figure 8-218
8-26
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
4) Remove the two straight pins [6], and remove the pickup roller 2 [8] while moving
the cover [7] in the direction of the arrow.
[7]
[8]
[6]
[6]
Figure 8-219
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-27
CHAPTER 8 ADF
2. Registration Roller
1) Remove the lower cover.
(See “B. External Covers.”)
2) Remove the link arm [1] from the registration roller shaft [2] by turning the link
arm.
[2]
[1]
Figure 8-220
3) While pushing the bushing [3] in the direction of the arrow, pull out the registration roller shaft [2] slowly.
[2]
[3]
Figure 8-221
8-28
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
3. Feeding Belt
1) Remove the lower cover.
(See “B. External Covers.”)
2) Remove the two tension springs [1].
[1]
Figure 8-222
3) Remove the E-ring [2], and remove the
bearing [3].
[3]
[2]
Figure 8-223
4) Remove the timing belt [4], and remove
the feeding belt drive roller [5] by moving
it in the direction of the arrow.
[4]
[5]
Figure 8-224
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-29
CHAPTER 8 ADF
5) Remove the two equalizer spring [6] and
the two feeding belt rolls [7].
[6]
[7]
[6]
[7]
Figure 8-225
6) Remove the two screws [9], and remove
the delivery sensor unit [8].
[9]
[8]
Figure 8-226
7) Remove the stop ring [10] (made of
resin); then, remove the bushing [11].
[10]
[11]
Figure 8-227
8-30
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
8) Remove the screw [12], and remove the
grounding wire [13]; then, remove the delivery roller unit [14] by moving it in the
direction of the arrow.
[14]
[12]
[13]
Figure 8-228
9) Remove the screw [15], and remove the
static eliminating brush [16].
[16]
[15]
Figure 8-229
10) Remove the two E-rings [17]; then, remove the timing belt [18], gear [19], and
two bushings [20].
[20]
[17]
[20]
[19]
[17]
[18]
Figure 8-230
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-31
CHAPTER 8 ADF
11) Pull out the actuator [21] in the direction
of the arrow; then, remove the feeding belt
link roller [22], and remove the feeding
belt [23].
[23]
[21]
[22]
Figure 8-231
8-32
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 8 ADF
E.
Electrical System
1. ADF Controller PCB
1) Remove the lower cover.
(See “B. External Covers.”)
2) Disconnect the five connectors [1], and
remove the two screws [2]; then, remove
the ADF controller PCB [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1]
Figure 8-232
2.
Original Placement Sensor and
Registration Paper Sensor
Pay attention to the colors of the cables
and connectors when connecting the connectors of the original placement sensor and the
registration paper sensor.
Original
placement
sensor
Cable color
Sensor
Original placement sensor
Registration paper sensor
Purple
Yellow
Table 8-201
Registration
paper sensor
Figure 8-233
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
8-33
CHAPTER 9
INSTALLATION
I.
II.
SELECTING A SITE ....................9-1
UNPACKING AND
INSTALLATION ............................9-2
A. Unpacking and Installation ....9-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
B. Placing Copy Paper...............9-9
III. MOVING THE MACHINE .......... 9-12
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
I. SELECTING A SITE
Keep the following in mind when selecting a site for installation; if possible, visit the user’s
before delivery of the machine:
• The site offers a power outlet whose rating is as specified (±10%) and which may be used
exclusively for the machine.
• The site is between 7.5°C/45.5°F and 32.5°C/90.5°F in temperature and between 5% and
85% in humidity. Avoid an area near water faucets, water boilers, humidifiers, and refrigerators.
• Avoid areas near sources of fire. The site must not be subject to ammonium gas or direct rays
of the sun. (As necessary, provide curtains.)
• The site must be well ventilated.
The level of ozone generated by the machine should not affect the health of people around it.
Some, however, may find the odor to be rather unpleasant, and ventilation is a very important
factor.
• The floor of the site must ensure that the machine’s feet will remain in contact, and will hold
the machine level.
• The machine must be at least 10 cm/3.9 in. away from any wall, and there must be adequate
space for work involving the machine.
10cm min.
10cm min.
Figure 9-101
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
9-1
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
When a piece of metal is brought in from a cold to warm place, droplets of water tend to form
on its surface. This phenomenon is known as “condensation” and, in copiers, can cause blank
copies.
If the machine has been brought in from a cold place, leave it alone at least for one hour before
starting to install it.
A.
Unpacking and Installation
Step
1
Work
Take out the copier and the attachments from
the shipping box, and check to make sure that
none is missing:
2
Remove the packaging bag and all fixing tape.
3
Remove the shipping attachment [1] (goldcolored screw) from the left of the machine.
Checks and remarks
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cassette
Copy tray
Power cord
ADF auxiliary tray (ADF type only)
User's Manual
Manual feed tray (for some areas only)
Language label for cassette (included with
universal cassette)
• Language label for ADF (ADF type only)
Shipping attachment [1]
You will be storing the shipping attachment
[1] inside the machine in step 9.
9-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
Step
4
Work
Remove the shipping attachment [2] (black
screw) from the right side of the machine.
Checks and remarks
Shipping attachment [2]
You will be storing the shipping attachment
[2] inside the machine in step 9.
5
Take out the protective member from the
manual feed tray. (Multifeeder type only)
Protective member
Caution:
This step applies only if the manual feed tray
is attached.
Attach the manual feed tray that comes with
the machine. (Multifeeder type only)
Caution:
This applies only if the manual feed tray
comes packaged with the machine.
Manual feed tray
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
9-3
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
Step
6
Work
Open the copyboard cover, and remove the
protective sheet. (Copyboard type only)
Checks and remarks
Caution:
If the protective sheet is not fond on the machine, go to the next step.
Protective sheet
Open the ADF, and remove the protective
members. (ADF type only)
Caution:
You will need this protective member when
relocating the machine. Be sure to store it
away appropriately.
Protective members
7
Pull the open/close lever found on the left of
the machine to open the machine’s top unit;
then, remove the two protective members.
Open/close lever
Caution:
If the protective member is not found on the
machine, go to the next step.
Protective member
9-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
Step
8
Work
Pick the fixing member from the bottom of the
top unit, and detach it.
9
Store the shipping attachments [1] and [2] removed in steps 3 and 4 in the machine’s bottom unit.
Checks and remarks
[2]
[1]
10
Hold the tab of the cartridge, and take it out of
the machine.
11
Holding the cartridge with the warning label
facing up, shake it several times in both directions (90°).
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
9-5
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
Step
12
Work
Place the cartridge on a level place, and pull
off the open seal.
Holding the tab, pull it straight out in the direction of the arrow.
Checks and remarks
Caution:
The seal can tear in the middle. Do no pull it at
an angle.
13
Hold the cartridge with the waning label facing up, and insert it into the machine with care
until it stops.
14
Push on the marking found on the top of the
machine to close it fully.
15
Open the original tray.
Caution:
This step applies to the ADF type only.
Original tray
9-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
Step
16
Work
While bending the ADF auxiliary tray in the
direction of arrows in the figure, insert it into
the holes on the edge of the original tray.
Checks and remarks
Holes
Caution:
This step applies to the ADF type only.
ADF auxiliary tray
17
Slide in and out the auxiliary tray several
times to make sure that it moves smoothly.
ADF auxiliary tray
Caution:
This step applies to the ADF type only.
18
Connect the power cord to the power cord
connector.
19
Connect the power plug to the power outlet;
then, turn on the power switch.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
• Make sure that the AE and DIRECT indicators turn on, the count/ratio indicator indicates ‘1’.
• Press the Count/Zoom Set key and the
Clear/Stop key to check that the copy count
is correct.
• Press the Default Ratio key to check that
different ratios are indicated.
• Check to make sure that a press on the
Zoom Mode key turns on the ‘0’ indication
and a press on the Count/Zoom Set key will
indicate the correct ratio.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
9-7
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
Step
20
Work
Attach the copy tray.
Checks and remarks
Check to make sure that the three grooves in
the copy tray are all in place.
21
Place copy paper inside the cassette. (For
how, see B. “Placing Copy Paper.”)
22
All notations on the label attached to the ADF
is in English. If a non-English language is
needed, select the appropriate label from
among those that come with the machine and
stick it.
Caution:
This step applies to the ADF type only.
23
Place the Test Sheet on the copyboard glass,
and make copies to see if the operation is correct.
24
Clean the externals of the machine and the
area around the machine.
9-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
• Check to make sure that there is no abnormal noise.
• Check to make sure that as many copies as
specified are made correctly.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
B.
Placing Copy Paper
1.
Universal Cassette
Step
1
2
Work
Take out the cassette from the machine, and
remove the protective members and the label.
Remove the rear guide plate as shown, and
mount it back to suit the size of the copy paper
to be used.
Checks and remarks
Rear end guide plate
Shift down, and pull off
Turn the fixing lever (front, rear) of the side
paper guide plate as shown, and unlock the
side paper guide plate.
Fixing lever (rear)
Fixing lever (front)
3
Slide the side paper guide plate to suit the
width of the copy paper to be used; then, turn
the fixing lever as shown to lock the side paper guide plate in place.
Side paper guide plate (rear)
Side paper guide plate (front)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
9-9
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
Step
4
Work
Place copy paper in the cassette, and set the
cassette into the machine.
5
All text on the label attached to the cassette is
English. If you need to replace it with a nonEnglish label, select the appropriate one from
among those packaged with the machine, and
attach it.
Checks and remarks
Language label for cassette
9-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
2.
250-Sheet/500-Sheet Cassette
Step
1
Work
Take out the cassette from the machine, and
remove the protective member.
2
Slide the rear end paper guide plate as shown
to match the size of the paper to be used.
Checks and remarks
Caution:
This step applies to the 500-sheet cassette
(LTR/LGL) only.
Rear end guide plate
3
Place copy paper in the cassette; then, set the
cassette in the machine.
• 500-sheet cassette
• 250-sheet cassette
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
9-11
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
III. MOVING THE MACHINE
If you need to move the machine by truck or any other means of transportation after installation, be sure to perform the following:
Caution:
Before starting the following work, check to make sure that the machines is not too hot. If it is, as
immediately after continuous copying, you may not be able to carry out step 8, in which the
shipping attachment is replaced.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Work
Turn on the power, and press the Default Ratio key to select 70%.
Press the Paper Select key to select the manual
feed tray; then, press the Copy Start key without placing any paper on the manual feed tray.
Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the
power plug from the outlet.
Pull the open/close lever found on the left of
the machine, and open the machine’s top unit.
Take out the shipping attachments [1] and [2]
stored in the machine’s bottom unit.
Checks and remarks
The count/ratio indicator will indicate '
'.
[2]
[1]
6
7
9-12
Detach the copy tray.
Press down on the
marking on the
machine's top unit to fully close the machine.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION
Step
8
Work
Fit the shipping attachments [1] and [2] detached in step 5 back to the machine.
Checks and remarks
Shipping attachment [1]
Shipping attachment [2]
9
Tape the machine's top unit in place to prevent
it from opening.
10
Place A4/LGL copy paper on the copyboard
glass, and close the copyboard cover; then,
tape it in place. (Copyboard type only)
Raise the ADF. Then, place two parts used as
packaging so that they fit closely around both
sides and the front of the ADF, as shown in the
diagram, and secure them with tape. (ADF
type only)
11
Gently lower the ADF and secure the main
unit by taping in eight places, as shown in the
diagram. (ADF type only)
Pack the machine, using the original packing
material and box.
Or tape the machine’s top in place so that it
will not open while in transit.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
9-13
CHAPTER 10
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
I.
PERIODICALLY REPLACED
PARTS .......................................
II. DURABLES AND
CONSUMABLES ......................
III. SCHEDULED SERVICING .......
IV. STORING AND HANDLING
THE CARTRIDGE .....................
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
10-1
10-1
10-1
A. Storing the Cartridge with the
Packaging Seal Intact ........ 10-2
B. Storing and Handling the
Cartridge with the Packaging
Seal Removed .................... 10-3
10-2
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS
The machine does not have parts which must be replaced on a periodical basis.
II. DURABLES AND CONSUMABLES
The machine does not have items designated as durables or consumables.
III. SCHEDULED SERVICING
The machine does not have any parts which require scheduled servicing.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
10-1
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
IV. STORING AND HANDLING THE CARTRIDGE
The cartridge is subject to the effects of the environment whether its packing seal is intact or
removed or whether it is inside the machine or otherwise, changing over time regardless of the
number of copies made. The degree of change is highly dependent on the site of installation and
how it is maintained, and no general rule may be drawn; however, it is important to exercise care
when storing or handling it.
A.
Storing the Cartridge with the Packaging Seal Intact
Humidity
Temperature
If you are storing the cartridge in a warehouse or workshop, be sure that the environment is as
indicated in Table 10-401; in addition, keep the following in mind:
• Avoid direct rays of the sun.
• Avoid vibration.
• Do not subject it to impact (as by hitting or dropping it).
Normal (9/10 of entire storage period)
between 0°C/32°F and 35°C/95°F
High temperature
between 35°C/95°F and 45°C/113°F
Low temperature
between -20°C/-4°F and 0°C/32°F
Temperature changes (within 3-min period; approx.)
from 40°C/104°F to 15°C/59°F
from -20°C/-4°F to 25°C/77°F
Harsh (1/10 of entire storage period)
Normal (9/10 of entire storage period)
between 35% and 85% RH
High humidity
between 85% and 95% RH
Low humidity
between 10% and 35% RH
Harsh (1/10 of entire storage period)
between 613.3 and 1013.3
(hPa; 0.6 to 1 atm)
Atmospheric pressure
Table 10-401 Temperature/Humidity Conditions for Storage
Temperature
between -20°C/-4°F and 40°C/104°F
Humidity
90% or less
Table 10-402 Conditions for Transportation
10-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
B.
Storing and Handling the Cartridge with the Packaging Seal
Removed
The photosensitive medium is an organic photoconducting (OPC) material, which would deteriorate if subjected to storing light.
The cartridge also holds toner, requiring the user to exercise care when storing or handling it.
(Be sure that the user stores it in an appropriate storage box for storage.)
1. Storage after Removing the Packaging Seal
a. Avoid areas subject to the direct rays of the sun, i.e., near a window. Do not keep it in a car for
a long time, as it will be subjected to an extremely high temperature. (This applies even if the
cartridge is inside a protective box.)
b. Avoid areas subjected to high or low temperature/humidity or where temperature or humidity
tends to change abruptly (e.g., near an air conditioner).
c. Avoid areas subject to dust, ammonium gas, or organic solvent.
d. Make sure that the cartridge is stored at 40°C/104°F or lower.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
10-3
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
2. Handling the Cartridge
a. Before setting the cartridge in the machine or if copies have white spots as when it starts to run
out of toner, hold the cartridge level and shake it about 90° several times as shown in Figure 10401 to even out the toner inside.
If you shake it in a different way, the toner can spill out of the developing assembly or the
cleaning assembly.
Figure 10-401
b. Do not place the cartridge on its end or turn it over as shown in Figure 10-402.
Figure 10-402
10-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING
c. Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum as by opening the shutter for the photosensitive drum cover found at the bottom of the cartridge.
(If you have soiled the surface of the photosensitive drum, wipe it with a flannel cloth coated
with toner. Do not clean it using solvents.)
d. Do not disassemble the cartridge.
e. Do not subject the cartridge to excess vibration or impact. In particular, do not impose force on
the shutter for the photosensitive drum shutter.
f.
Make sure that it is out of reach of children.
g. The photosensitive drum is susceptible to strong light, and the light-blocking shutter is provided as a means of protection.
If the drum is exposed to strong light for a long time, however, copies can start to show white
spots or vertical bands. Try leaving the machine alone as long as possible if such a problem is
noted; the memory (i.e., cause of white spots or vertical bands), however, may not disappear.
Keep the following in mind:
Caution:
1. Try to work briskly when removing a jam or replacing the cartridge.
2. If the cartridge must be taken out of the machine for storage, be sure to put it in a protective
box or put a cover over it. Do not leave it outside the machine unprotected.
Reference:
If the photosensitive drum is exposed to light of 1500 lux (general lighting) for 5 min and then
left alone in a dark place for 5 min, it should recover so that it will not cause practical problems. Nevertheless, avoid direct sunshine. (The rays of the sun is as strong as 10000 and
30000 lux.)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
10-5
CHAPTER 11
TROUBLESHOOTING
I.
MAINTENANCE AND
INSPECTION ............................ 11-3
A. Image Adjustment Basic
Procedure ........................... 11-3
B. Points to Note for
Servicing ............................ 11-4
II. STANDARDS AND
ADJUSTMENTS ....................... 11-5
A. Mechanical ......................... 11-5
B. ADF .................................. 11-30
C. Electrical ........................... 11-41
III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE
FAULTS ................................... 11-48
A. Making Initial Checks ....... 11-48
B. Sample Image Faults ....... 11-52
C. Troubleshooting Image
Faults ................................ 11-53
IV. TROUBLESHOOTING
MALFUNCTIONS .................... 11-61
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
A. Troubleshooting
Malfunctions ..................... 11-61
V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING
PROBLEMS ............................ 11-75
A. Copy Paper Jam ............... 11-75
B. Faulty Feeding .................. 11-78
VI. ARRANGEMENT AND
FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL
PARTS ..................................... 11-79
A. Sensors and Solenoids .... 11-79
B. Switches ........................... 11-80
C. Lamp, Heater, Motor, Etc. 11-81
D. PCBs ................................ 11-82
E. ADF .................................. 11-83
F. Variable Resistors (VR) and
Check Pins by PCB .......... 11-84
VII. SELF DIAGNOSIS .................. 11-86
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Guide to the Troubleshooting Procedure
This chapter provides troubleshooting instructions in the form of tables prepared based on
generally found flow charts. Study the following for an idea of how to use them:
AC power is absent.
Cause
Power plug
Step
1
Covers
2
Power source
3
---------------
4
Checks
Is the power plug connected to the
power outlet?
Are the front door and delivery cover
closed fully?
Is the rated voltage found at the power
outlet?
Is the rated voltage present between J11 and -2? (J1 is found near the power
cord mount.)
YES/NO
NO
NO
Action
Connect the plug.
NO
Close the door or the
cover.
Inform the user that
YES
Go to step 6.
(Rest omitted.)
• To find out the cause (possible fault) of a specific problem, see the "Cause" column.
If the problem is “AC power is absent,” you may suspect that the power plug is disconnected,
covers are not closed fully, or power is absent at the main source.
• If you want to find out the checks to make or action to take, go through the steps: answer the
questions under “Checks”; if yes, take the action shown. Otherwise, go to the next step and
make the indicated checks.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-1
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
<Step>
<Checks>
1
Is the power
plug connected to the
power outlet?
<YES/NO>
<Action>
NO
Connect
the plug.
NO
Close the door
or the cover.
NO
Advise the user
that the problem
is not the copier's.
YES
2
Are the front door
and the delivery cover
closed firmly?
YES
3
Is the rated
voltage present at the
power source?
YES
Rest omitted.
• Often, you will find the following instructions when checking the voltage using a meter: “measure the voltage between J109-1 (+) and -2 (-) on the DC controller PCB.” The symbol “+”
indicates the terminal to which you are expected to connect the positive probe of the meter and
“-,” the negative probe.
example:
J109-1 (+) ..... Connect the positive probe.
J109-2 (-) ...... Connect the negative probe.
11-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
I. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
A.
Making Pre-Checks
Image Adjustment Basic Procedure
Adjusting the Optimum Density
Clean the parts.
Scanning system,
pickup/feeding system,
delivery assembly
Is gray scale No. 9
barely visible?
YES
NO
NO
Set it at
the middle.
Is the copy density
correction switch (SW101) set
to the middle index?
(Note 1)
YES
Can the
deviation be corrected
using the copy density correction
switch (SW101)?
(Note 1)
YES
NO
Select non-AE, and set the copy density
adjusting lever to the middle index; then,
make two to three copies of the Test
Sheet (NA-3).
Check the following:
1. Density of gray scale No. 9
2. Presence/absence of difference between front
and rear (Note 2)
3. Density of gray scale No. 1 (good or bad; Note 2)
4. Fogging of background (Note 2)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Is the optimum
density obtained by intensity
adjustment?
(Note 3)
YES
END
NO
Check the following:
1. Cartridge
2. Scanning lamp
3. AE sensor PCB
4. DC controller PCB
5. Composite power supply PCB
(See the appropriate troubleshooting
procedure.)
Note:
1. Applies only if the machine is equipped with a copy
density correction switch (SW101).
2. The machine is not equipped with a function to
correct image faults. See the appropriate
troubleshooting procedure.
3. See p. 11-42.
11-3
B.
Points to Note for Servicing
Copyboard, Scanner
Item
Tools/solvent
Work/remarks
Copyboard cover
Alcohol
Cleaning.
Copyboard glass
Alcohol
Cleaning.
Blower brush
Cleaning.
Lens
Scanning lamp
Lint-free paper
Reflecting plate
No. 1 through
No. 6 mirror
Blower brush
Dry wiping.
Tools/solvent
Inlet guide
Solvent
Tool/solvent
Drum cover
shutter
Tools/solvents
Most cloth
Work/remarks
Cleaning; be sure to
remove all toner to prevent
toner soiling images.
Pickup, Feeding, and Transfer Assemblies and Static Eliminator
Work/remarks
Cleaning.
ADF
Item
Item
If dirt cannot be removed,
dry-wiping with lint-free
paper.
Fixing Assembly, Delivery Assembly
Item
Cartridge
Work/remarks
Feeding belt
Cloth moistened with
water*
Dry-wiping.
Separation pad
Cloth
Cleaning.
Pickup roller
Cloth moistened with
water* or alcohol
Cleaning.
Item
Tools/solvents
Work/remarks
Single-feeder
pickup roller
Moist cloth or alcohol
Cleaning.
Multifeeder,
Pickup roller
Moist cloth or alcohol
Cleaning.
Cassette pickup
roller
Moist cloth or alcohol
Cleaning.
Registration roller
Moist cloth
Cleaning.
Transfer guide
Moist cloth
Cleaning.
Transfer charging
roller
Lint-free paper
Cleaning. Do not use
water or solvent. Take
care not to touch it or
leave solvent or oil.
Static eliminator
Special brush
Cleaning.
Feed belt
Moist cloth
Cleaning.
*Be sure to wring it well.
11-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
II. STANDARDS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A.
Mechanical
1.
a.
Copier
Leading Edge Non-Image Width
Make adjustments so that the leading edge non-image width is 2.0 ±1.5 mm when the Test
Sheet is copied in Direct.
Caution:
If you have performed this adjustment, be sure to adjust the image leading edge margin.
2.0 ± 1.5mm
Figure 11-201
1) Turn VR105 on the DC controller PCB so that the width is as indicated.
VR105
J130
J102
J102
VR104VR105VR106
J131
J101
J101
J114
VR107
VR103VR102
J103
J107
J106
J104
J105
J109
Figure 11-202
Turing VR105 and Leading Edge Non-Image Width
Direction of VR105
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Leading edge non-image width
Decreases
Increases
Table 11-201
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-5
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
b.
Image Leading Edge Margin (registration activation timing)
Make adjustments so that the leading edge margin is 2.5 ±1.5 mm when the Test Sheet is
copied.
Caution:
Be sure to check that the leading edge non-image width is as indicated before performing this
adjustment.
2.5 ± 1.5mm
Figure 11-203
1) Turn VR104 on the DC controller PCB so that the margin is as indicated.
VR104
J130
J102
J102
VR104VR105VR106
J131
J101
J101
J114
VR107
VR103VR102
J103
J107
J106
J104
J105
J109
Figure 11-204
Turing VR104 and Image Leading Edge Margin
Direction of VR104
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Image leading edge margin
Increases
Decreases
Table 11-202
11-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
c.
Adjusting the Mirror Position (optical length between No. 1 mirror and No. 2 mirror)
If you have replaced the scanner drive cable, you must adjust the mirror position, by changing
the position of the cable retainer of the No. 1 mirror mount.
Reference:
1. As more and more copies are made, the cable tends to become slack, requiring adjustment.
2. If the optical length between the No. 1 mirror and the No. 2 mirror is not correct, the horizontal
reproduction ratio will be wrong, causing poor sharpness or blurred images.
1) Fit the mirror positioning tool (FY9-3009) as shown.
Figure 11-205
2) Remove the copyboard glass. (See Chapter 7.III.C.1. “Removing the Copyboard Glass”.)
3) Loosen the screws used to secure the cable retainer at the rear and the front of the No. 1 mirror
mount [1].
[1]
Figure 11-206
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-7
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4) Turn the cable drive pulley [3] so that the three shafts [2] of the mirror positioning tool for the front
and the rear may be arranged as shown.
[2]
[3]
[2]
Figure 11-207 (rear)
[2]
[2]
Figure 11-208 (front)
11-8
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
5) While keeping the condition of 4), tighten the positioning screw at the rear and the front of the No.
1 mirror mount [1].
[1]
Figure 11-209 (rear)
[1]
Figure 11-210 (front)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-9
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
d.
Checking the Force of the Cassette Spring
If the force of the spring used to hold up the holding plate of the cassette is not correct, pickup
faults or the like can occur.
If a fault is suspected, check the force of the spring using a spring gauge (CK-0054), and
replace the spring if it is not as indicated:
Standard: 970 ±150 g
Making Measurements
Push the spring gauge against the middle of the spring as shown, and check to make sure that
the reading of the spring gauge is 970 ±150 g when the holding plate is 18 mm away from the
bottom of the cassette.
Spring gauge
(CK-0054)
18mm
Holding plate
Cassette spring
Cassette
Figure 11-211
11-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
e-1. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable
Wind 1.5 times. (black
cable)
Wind 7.5 times. (silvercolored cable)
Figure 11-212
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-11
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
e-2. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable
1. Before Starting the Work
Prepare the following:
• Mirror positioning tool (FY9-3009)
• Cable clip (FY9-3017)
• Adhesive tape
1) Set the mirror positioning tool as shown.
Figure 11-213
2) Prepare about five strips of adhesive tape (each one about 20 × 50 mm).
3) Remove the copyboard glass. (See Chapter 7.III.C.1.“Removing the Copyboard Glass.”)
4) Disconnect the connectors (J101, J131) [1] from the DC controller PCB.
[1]
Figure 11-214
11-12
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
5) If the machine is equipped with an ADF, free the hook [2], and disconnect the two relay connectors [3] from the left upper stay [4].
[2]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[2]
Figure 11-215
6) Remove the three screws [5], and detach the left upper stay [4].
[5]
[5]
[4]
Figure 11-216
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-13
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
7) Remove the four screws [7], and detach the lens cover [8].
[7]
[7]
[8]
Figure 11-217
11-14
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
2. Routing the Reversing Cable
1) Wind the reversing cables (silver-colored) [2] on the cable drive pulley [1] 7.5 times with the
longer of the two on top; then, secure it in position with a cable clip [3].
[1]
Longer end
Shorter end
[2]
Face with a marking
Figure 11-218
[1]
[3]
[3]
Top view
Figure 11-219
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-15
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
2) Put the cable drive pulley [1] into the shaft [4], and secure it in position with an E-ring [5].
When putting the cable drive pulley into the shaft, be sure that the hook is at the front.
[5]
Hook
[1]
(front)
[4]
Figure 11-220
3) Hook the shorter end [6] on the pulley [7].
[7]
[6]
Figure 11-221
11-16
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4) Lead the shorter end [6] under the No. 1 mirror mount [8] and the No. 2/3 mirror mount [9]; then,
hook it on the left rear pulley [10] and the pulley [11] of the No. 2/3 mirror mount.
[11]
[9]
[8]
[10]
[6]
Figure 11-222
5) After fitting the shorter end [6] on the cable hook [12], secure its end with adhesive tape [13].
Be sure that the secured end of the cable is found where the hole in the left side plate and the tip
of the cable matches.
[13]
[12]
[6]
Figure 11-223
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-17
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
6) Lead the longer end [14] along the cable drive pulley, and hook it on the pulley [15] on the right
front side.
[14]
[15]
[1]
Figure 11-224
7) Lead the longer end [14] under the No. 1 mirror mount [8] and the No. 2/3 mirror mount [9];
then, hook it on the pulley [16] on the left front side and the pulley [17] of the No. 2/3 mirror
mount.
[17]
[8]
[14]
[16]
[9]
Figure 11-225
11-18
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
8) Hook the longer cable [14] on the cable hook [18]; then, secure its end to the left side with
adhesive tape [19].
Be sure that the secured end of the cable is found where the hole in the left side plate and the tip
of the cable matches.
[18]
[19]
[14]
Figure 11-226
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-19
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3. Routing the Forwarding Cable
1) Fit the longer end forwarding cable (black) [2] on the top hook of the cable drive pulley [1], and
wind it 1.5 times. Then, secure the shorter end [3] as shown with adhesive tape [4].
[4]
[3]
Face without a marking
[2]
[1]
Figure 11-227
2) Lead the longer end [5] along the cable drive pulley [1] as shown, and hook it on the pulley [6]
on the right front side.
[1]
[5]
[6]
Figure 11-228
11-20
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3) Lead the longer end [5] under the No. 1 mirror mount [7]; then, hook it on the pulley [8] of the No.
2/3 mirror mount, and lead it between the No. 1 mirror mount [7] and the scanning lamp [9].
[8]
[7]
[9]
[5]
Figure 11-229
4) Hook the end of the longer end [5] on the hole [10] on the right side.
[10]
[5]
Figure 11-230
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-21
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
5) Free the shorter end [3], and hook it on the pulley [11] on the right rear side.
[3]
[11]
Figure 11-231
6) Lead the shorter end [3] under the No. 1 mirror mount [7], and hook it on the pulley [12] of the
No. 2/3 mirror mount as shown; then, lead it between the No. 1 mirror mount [7] and the
scanning lamp [9].
[12]
[3]
[9]
[7]
Figure 11-232
11-22
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
7) Hook the end of the shorter end [3] on the hole [13] on the right side.
[3]
[13]
Figure 11-233
8) Free the shorter end [3] and the longer end [5] (reversing cable), and connect both with a spring
[14]; then, fit the stopper [15].
[14]
[3]
[15]
[5]
Figure 11-234
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-23
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
9) Detach the pulley clip [16] from the cable drive pulley [1].
[1]
[16]
Figure 11-235
11-24
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4. Positioning the No. 1 Mirror Mount
1) Fix the rear and the front of the No. 1 mirror mount [1] temporarily to the metal fixing [2] of the
forwarding cable.
[1]
[2]
Figure 11-236 (rear)
[2]
[1]
Figure 11-237 (front)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-25
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
2) Turn the cable drive pulley [4] so that the three shafts [3] of the mirror positioning tool for rear and
front is as shown.
[4]
[3]
[3]
Figure 11-238 (rear)
[3]
[3]
Figure 11-239 (front)
11-26
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3) While keeping the condition of step 2), tighten the positioning screw on the rear and front of the
No. 1 mirror mount [1].
[1]
Figure 11-240 (rear)
[1]
Figure 11-241 (front)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-27
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
f.
Point to Note When Mounting the Scanning Lamp
When mounting the scanning lamp, be sure that its logo mark (manufacturer’s name) is toward
the front. Further, be sure that the protrusion near its middle is as shown.
Logo mark
(front)
Scanning lamp
(mirror mount moving in reverse)
45˚ (approx.)
Figure 11-242
Caution:
• If you have replaced the scanning lamp, you must adjust the intensity of the lamp (p. 11-42)
and perform AE adjustment.
• Do not touch the lamp when handling it.
11-28
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
g.
Points to Note When Mounting the Fuse
When mounting the thermal fuse of the No. 1 mirror mount, be sure that the fuse is oriented as
shown.
Make sure that the fuse is in contact with the reflecting plate.
Reflecting plate
(front)
Thermal fuse
Figure 11-243
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG.1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-29
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
B.
ADF
1.
Adjusting the Original Stop Position
Adjust the original stop position in the following order:
1. Correcting original skew
2. Adjusting the rear/front original stop position
3. Adjusting the original leading edge stop position
2. Correcting Original Skew
1) Obtain a sheet of A4 or LTR white copy paper, and draw two lines as indicated.
• The sheet will be used as a test sheet.
10mm
10mm
A4/LTR copy papper
Figure 11-244
2) Turn on the machine, and place the test sheet prepared in step 1) on the original tray.
Figure 11-245
11-30
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3) Press the Copy Start key to make a copy.
4) Check to make sure that the difference between L1 and L2 on the copy is 1.8 mm (standard) or
less.
L1
L2
280mm
Copy image
L1-L2=0 ± 1.8mm
Figure 11-246
5) If the difference is not as specified, turn the adjusting screw found to the side of the left hinge
unit to make adjustments.
Adjusting screw
Figure 11-247
Relationship between Adjusting Screw and L1/L2
Direction of turn
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Relationship between L1 and L2
L1 > L2
L1 < L2
Table 11-203
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-31
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3.
Adjusting the Rear/Front Original Stop Position
You must first correct original skew before adjusting the rear/front original stop position.
1) Obtain a sheet of A4 or LTR white copy paper, and draw two lines as indicated.
• The sheet will be used as a test sheet.
10mm
10mm
A4/LTR copy papper
Figure 11-248
2) Remove the original tray cover from below the original tray.
Original
tray cover
Figure 11-249
11-32
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3) Turn on the machine, and place the test sheet prepared in step 1) on the original tray.
Figure 11-250
4) Press the Copy Start key to make a copy.
5) Check to make sure that the distance L3 on the copy image indicated is 10 ±2.5 mm (standard)
or less.
L3
Copy image
L3=10 ± 2.5mm
Figure 11-251
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-33
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
6) If the distance is not as specified, loosen the pinion gear positioning screw under the original
tray, and adjust the position of the pinion gear.
Pinion gear
Pinion gear positioning
screw
A
B
Figure 11-252
Relationship between Pinion Gear Position and L3
Direction of pinion gear
A
B
L3
Increases
Decreases
Table 11-204
11-34
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.
Adjusting the Original Leading Edge Stop Position
You must first correct original skew and adjust the rear/front original stop position before
adjusting the original leading edge stop position.
1) Obtain a sheet of A4 or LTR white copy paper, and draw two lines as indicated.
• The sheet will be used as a test sheet.
10mm
10mm
A4/LTR copy papper
Figure 11-253
2) Remove the screw, and remove the ADF controller cover.
Screw
ADF controller cover
Figure 11-254
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-35
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3) Turn on the machine, and place the test sheet prepared in step 1) on the original tray.
Figure 11-255
4) Press the Copy Start key to make a copy.
5) Check to make sure that the distance L4 on the copy image indicated is 10 +2.0, -2.5 mm
(standard) or less.
L4
Copy image
L4=10 ± 2.0mm
Figure 11-256
11-36
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
F012
A
ON
789
1
2
3456
B CDE
6) If the distance is not as specified, shift bit 1 of the DIP switch (SW1) on the ADF controller
PCB to ON, and place an A4 or LTR white copy paper on the original tray.
ON
1
2
SW1
Figure 11-257
7) Press the push switch (PSW) on the ADF controller PCB.
• The copy paper will be picked up from the original tray and stopped on the copyboard glass.
F012
A
ON
2
789
1
3456
B CDE
PSW
Figure 11-258
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-37
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
8) Use the rotary switch (SW2) on the ADF controller PCB to adjust the original leading edge
stop position.
Moving the rotary switch by a single notch changes the original stop position by about 0.3 mm.
Press the push switch (PSW) after deciding on a position to discharge the copy paper and store
the optimum value.
F012
A
ON
789
1
2
3456
B CDE
PSW
SW2
Figure 11-259
Relationship between Rotary Switch Direction and Original Position
Direction of rotary switch
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Position (shift) of original
Toward leading edge
Toward trailing edge
Table 11-205
11-38
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
F012
A
ON
789
1
2
3456
B CDE
Example:
If L4 is 13 mm,
You must shift the original stop position toward the leading edge by 3 mm.
1) Place a sheet of A4 or LTR white copy paper on the original tray.
2) Shift bit 1 of the DIP switch (SW1) on the ADF controller PCB to ON; then, push the push
switch (PSW) to pick up the copy paper.
ON
1
2
SW1
Figure 11-260
F012
A
ON
2
789
1
3456
B CDE
3) Turn the rotary switch (SW2) on the ADF controller PCB clockwise by 10 notches.
SW2
Figure 11-261
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-39
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4) Press the push switch (PSW) on the ADF controller PCB.
• The copy paper on the copyboard will be discharged, and the optimum value will be stored.
F012
A
ON
2
789
1
3456
B CDE
PSW
Figure 11-262
11-40
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
C.
1.
Electrical
After Replacing the Major Parts
Parts
Scanning lamp
Adjustment
1. Intensity of the scanning lamp
2. AE mechanism
AE sensor PCB
1. AE mechanism
Composite power supply
PCB*1
(1. Intensity of the scanning lamp)
(2. AE mechanism)
DC controller PCB
1. Intensity of the scanning lamp
2. AE mechanism
3. Leading edge non-image width
4. Image leading edge margin
5. Reproduction ratio (fine adjustment)
ADF controller PCB
1. Excute original leading edge stop position adjustment
*1: If you have replaced the composite power supply PCB, check copy images using the Test
Sheet; if (and only if) an image fault is found, adjust the intensity of the scanning lamp and
execute AE adjustment.
Table 11-206
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-41
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
2.
Adjusting the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp
Adjust the intensity of the scanning lamp if you have replaced any of the following:
• DC controller PCB
• Composite power supply PCB (See p.11-41.)
• Scanning lamp
Caution:
If you have performed this adjustment, you must always perform AE adjustment.
Making Adjustments
1) Set a cartridge in the machine.
2) Set the density correction switch (SW101) to its middle index.
SW101
Figure 11-263
3) Turn off the AE mechanism, and set the copy density adjusting lever on the control panel to its
middle index.
4) Place the Test Sheet on the copyboard, and make a copy.
5) Turn VR107 on the DC controller PCB gradually until gray scale No. 9 is barely visible.
VR107
J130
J102
J102
VR104VR105VR106
J131
J101
J101
J114
VR107
VR103VR102
J107
J103
J106
J104
J105
J109
Figure 11-264
VR107 and Copy Density
Direction of VR107
Clockwise
Counterclockwise
Copy density
Lighter
Darker
Table 11-207
11-42
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3.
AE Adjustment
Perform this adjustment if you have replaced any of the following:
• DC controller PCB
• Composite power supply PCB (See p.11-41.)
• AE sensor PCB
• Scanning lamp
Making Adjustments
Before Starting the Work
• Obtain a newspaper with more or less even print. (Avoid ones with many photos or large
display text.)
• Obtain five sheets of white sheets of paper.
• Be sure that the intensity of the scanning lamp has been adjusted when you have replaced the
scanning lamp.
• Set the density correction switch (SW101) to the middle setting. If the machine is not
equipped with a density correction switch, set the density adjusting lever to the middle setting.
1) Short JP103 and JP104 on the DC controller PCB.
SERVICE
JP104
JP103
Figure 11-265
2) While keeping the condition in step 1), turn on the power.
• The scanning lamp will turn on, and the main motor (M1) will rotate.
3) Stop shorting JP103 and JP104.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-43
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4) Turn VR103 on the DC controller PCB fully clockwise.
J130
J102
J102
VR104VR105VR106
J131
J101
J101
J114
VR107
VR103VR102
J107
J103
J106
J104
J105
J109
VR103
Figure 11-266
5) Place a newspaper on the copyboard, and close the copyboard cover.
6) Turn VR102 so that the display indicates ‘A3’ to ‘Ad’.
J130
J102
J101
J102
VR104VR105VR106
J131
J101
J114
VR107
VR103VR102
J107
J103
J106
J104
J105
J109
VR102
Figure 11-267
7) Remove the newspaper from the copyboard, and place five sheets of copy paper in its place;
then, close the copyboard cover.
8) Turn VR103 on the DC controller PCB so that the display will indicate ‘52’ to ‘5c’.
J130
J102
J102
VR104VR105VR106
J131
J101
J101
J114
VR107
VR103VR102
J107
J103
J106
J104
J105
J109
VR103
Figure 11-268
11-44
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
9) Repeat steps 5) through 8) so that the values of both VR102 and VR103 are target values.
Caution:
If you cannot set VR102 and VR103 to the target values at the same time, turn VR103 fully
counterclockwise, and go back to step 5) and make adjustments once again.
10) Make a copy, and check to make sure that it is free of fogging and its text is adequately dark.
• If the copy is foggy or its text is too light, go back to step 1) and start over.
• If the results of adjustment for a second time are not good, make adjustments using the density correction switch (SW101).
Lighter
Darker
SW101
Figure 11-269
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-45
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4.
Adjusting the Reproduction Ratio (fine adjustment)
Adjust the reproduction ratio if you have replaced the following:
• DC controller PCB
Making Adjustments
Before Starting the Work
• Meter
1) Before replacing the DC controller PCB, turn on the power; then, connect the meter probes to
CP23 and GND on the DC controller PCB, and measure the voltage.
+ probe ........CP23
- probe .........GND
VR106
GND
CP23
CP23
VR107
CPGND1
VR104 VR105 VR106
Figure 11-270
2) After replacing the DC controller PCB, measure the voltage as in step 1); then, turn VR106 on
the DC controller PCB so that the reading is the same as before replacement.
11-46
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
5. Checking the Photointerrupters
1) Set the meter range to 12 VDC.
2) Connect the - probe to GND (CPGND1) on the DC controller PCB.
GND
CP23
VR107
CPGND1
VR104 VR105 VR106
Figure 11-271
3) Make checks as instructed.
Reference:
The photointerrupers other than those shown in Table 11-209 are connected in a matrix, hence
the omission from the table.
Sensor
Connector
PS1
Scanner home position
sensor (SCHP)
J101-3
PS2
Lens home position sensor (LHP)
J109-10
PS4
Vertical path roller paper sensor (PDP)
J132-5
Q751
Pre-registration roller
paper sensor (RPD)
J108-3
Checks
During standby, move
the scanner by hand.
During standby, move
the lens mount by
hand.
During standby, move
the detecting lever by
hand.
During standby, move
the detecting lever by
hand.
When the light-blocking plate is at PS1,
When the light-blocking plate is not at PS1,
When the light-blocking plate is at PS2,
When the light-blocking plate is not at PS2,
When the light-blocking plate is at PS4,
When the light-blocking plate is not at PS4,
When the light-blocking plate is at Q751,
When the lightblocking plate is not at
Q751,
Voltage
(approx.)
5V
0V
5V
0V
5V
0V
0V
5V
Table 11-208
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-47
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
III. TROUBLESHOOTING IMAGE FAULTS
A.
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Making Initial Checks
Site Environment
Check the site against the following considerations:
The voltage of the power source is as rated.
The site must not be subject to high temperature or humidity (as near a water faucet, water
boiler, humidifier) or dust. The machine must not be near a source of fire.
The site must not be subject to ammonium gas.
The machine must not be exposed to direct rays of the sun. (As necessary, instruct the user to
provide curtains.)
The site must be well ventilated.
The machine must be kept level.
2.
Checking the Originals
Check the originals to find out whether the problem in question is caused by the machine or the
originals.
a. The copy density adjusting lever is often best if set to the middle index.
b. Originals with a red tint tend to produce copies with poor contrast; e.g., red sheets.
c. Originals which are diazo copies or with transparency tend to produce copies which can be
mistaken for "foggy" copies.
Originals prepared in pencil tend to produce copies with "light" images.
3.
Copyboard Cover and Copyboard Glass
If the copyboard cover or the copyboard glass is soiled, clean it with mild detergent solution or
alcohol; if scratched, replace it.
4.
Lens
Check the lens for dirt. If any, clean it with a cotton swab.
5. Checking the Transfer Charging Roller
a. Check the transfer charging roller for dirt or fault (scratches).
6.
Feeding Assembly
Check the feeding assembly for dirt. If any dirt is found, clean it with a moist cloth.
7. Copy Paper
a. Is copy paper of a type recommended by Canon?
b. Is copy paper moist?
Try paper fresh out of package.
11-48
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
8.
a.
Consumable
Cartridge
When the cartridge starts to run out of toner, copies will start to have white lines or spots as
shown.
Figure 11-301
Try the following as necessary:
1) Take out the cartridge from the machine, and shake it several times.
Figure 11-302
2) Set the cartridge back into the machine, and make copies.
• If the copies are normal,
You may continue to use the cartridge, but the user must know that it must be replaced with
a new cartridge soon.
• If the copies are not normal,
Replace the new cartridge.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-49
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
9.
Others
When a machine is brought in from a cold place (e.g., warehouse) to a warm place, condensation can occur inside it, leading to various problems; e.g.,
a. Condensation on the scanner (glass, lens, mirror, reflecting plate) will cause dark images.
b. The drum is likely to be cold (high OPC electrical resistance), not enabling good contrast.
c. Condensation in the pickup/feeding assembly tends to cause feeding faults.
d. Condensation on the lower roller of the manual feed assembly will reduce friction, causing
pickup faults.
If condensation is noted, dry wipe the parts in question.
The cartridge can develop condensation if it is opened immediately after it has been brought
from a cold to warm place. Instruct the user so that the cartridge is not opened before it has become
used to the room temperature (one to two hours).
11-50
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-51
NOTE: The samples are created intentionally. The NA-3 Test Sheet was copied in the direct mode
in A3 and printed with a reduction of about 19%; actual images may be somewhat different.
11-52
11-6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
C.
1
2
3
Troubleshooting Image Faults
The copy is too light. (halftone area only)
The copy is too light. (including solid area)
The copy is too light. (enter image, appreciably)
Cause
Lens, Reflecting plate, AE
sensor, Static
eliminator
---------------
Step
1
Transfer
charging roller
3
Copy paper
Transfer lower
guide, Varistor
2
Checks
Clean the lens, reflecting plate, AE sensor,
and static eliminator. Is the problem
corrected?
Action
End.
Turn off the power in the middle of a
copying run, and open the machine’s top
unit. Is the toner image before transfer
more or less normal? (Be sure to make a
check in a short time to protect the drum
from light.)
Is the transfer charging roller normal?
NO
Go to step 6.
NO
4
Try fresh copy paper. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
5
Measure the electrical resistance on the
transfer lower guide plate and the side
plate (metal) of the fixing assembly. Is it
0Ω?
YES
1. Mount the transfer
charging roller
correctly.
2. Replace the transfer
charging roller.
1. The copy paper may
be moist. Instruct the
user on the correct
method of storage.
2. Inform the user that
using non-recommended paper may
not bring the best
results.
1. Check to find out if
the transfer lower
guide happens to be in
contact with a metal
part (side plate).
2. Replace the varistor.
1. Check the transfer
high-voltage terminal
contacts for electrical
continuity.
2. Check the composite
power supply and the
DC controller PCB.
End.
Replace the electric unit
(composite power supply
PCB, DC controller
PCB).
Composite
power supply
PCB, DC
controller
PCB
Cartridge
Developing
bias, Developing bias
terminal
YES/NO
YES
NO
6
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Replace the cartridge. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
NO
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-53
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4
5
The copy has uneven density. (darker at front)
The copy has uneven density. (lighter at front)
Cause
Scanner
Step
1
Cartridge,
Scanning
lamp
2
Transfer
charging
roller
6
Checks
Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting
plate, lens, and mirror. Is the problem
corrected?
Turn off the power in the middle of a
copying run, and open the machine. Is
the toner image on the photosensitive
drum before transfer more or less
uneven?
YES/NO
YES
YES
NO
Action
End.
1. Replace the cartridge.
2. Replace the scanning lamp.
1. Mount the transfer
charging roller
correctly.
2. Replace the transfer
charging roller
correctly.
The copy is foggy. (entire face)
Cause
Step
1
Checks
Is the density correction switch
(SW101) or the density adjusting lever
set to the middle setting?
YES/NO
NO
Scanner
2
YES
Grounding
spring
3
Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting
plate, lens, and mirror. Is the problem
corrected?
Set the cartridge in the machine. Is
there electrical continuity between the
PCB of the base of the drum and the
machine’s top unit?
---------------
Scanning
lamp, Developing bias
11-54
NO
YES
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Action
Set the switch or the
lever to the middle
setting, and make a
copy. If the image is
still foggy, to step 2).
End.
Check to see if the
grounding spring is
mounted correctly (in
reference to the drum
drive gear).
1. Check the activation
of the scanning
lamp.
2. Check the developing assembly.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
7
8
9
The copy is foggy vertically.
The copy has black lines. (vertical, fuzzy, thick)
The copy has black lines. (vertical, fine)
Cause
Scanner
Transfer
guide assembly
Cartridge
Step
1
2
3
Checks
Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting
plate, lens, and mirror. Is the problem
corrected?
Clean the transfer guide assembly. Is
the problem corrected?
YES/NO
YES
Action
End.
YES
End.
Take out and then set the cartridge
once again. Is the problem corrected?
YES
NO
End.
Replace the cartridge.
10 The copy has white spots. (vertical)
11 The copy has white lines. (vertical)
Cause
Fixing
assembly
Step
1
Cartridge
2
Static eliminator
Transfer
charging
roller
3
4
Cartridge
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Checks
Turn off the power in the middle of a
copying run, and open the machine’s
top unit. Does the copy image before
moving through the fixing assembly
have white spots or white lines?
Shake the cartridge several times. Is
the problem corrected?
YES/NO
YES
Clean the static eliminator. Is the
problem corrected?
Is there foreign matter or scratches in
the transfer charging roller assembly?
YES
YES
YES
NO
Action
Check the fixing
assembly.
Inform the user that
the cartridge is running out of toner.
End.
Remove the foreign
matter, or replace the
transfer charging
roller.
Replace the cartridge.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-55
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
12 The copy has white spots. (horizontal)
Cause
Copy paper
Scanner rail
Step
1
Checks
Is the paper of a recommended type?
YES/NO
YES
2
Try paper fresh out of package. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
3
Is the problem noted at the same
position on all copies?
Yes
Scanning
lamp, Developing bias
NO
Action
Try a recommend
type. If the results are
good, ask the user to
use a recommended
type.
The paper may be
moist. Instruct the user
on the correct method
of storing paper.
1. Check the scanner
rail for foreign
matter.
2. Adjust the tension
of the scanner cable.
Check the scanning
lamp for flickering
and the presence/
absence of a developing bias.
13 The back of the copy is soiled.
Cause
---------------
Step
1
Transfer
guide assembly
2
Checks
Turn off the power while copy paper is
moving through the feeding assembly.
Is the back of the paper soiled?
Is the transfer guide assembly soiled?
Feeding
assembly
Pickup guide
assembly,
Delivery
roller
3
Is the feeding assembly soiled?
11-56
YES/NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Action
Go to step 3.
1. Clean the transfer
guide.
2. Clean the registration roller.
3. Check the varistor.
4. Check the cartridge
for leakage of toner.
Clean the feeding
assembly.
Clean the pickup guide
assembly and the
delivery roller.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
14 The copy has a fixing fault.
Cause
Copy paper
Step
1
Checks
Is the copy paper of a recommended
type?
YES/NO
NO
Fixing film
2
Is the problem vertical and, in addition, in the form of lines?
YES
Fixing heater
3
Does the heater turn on when the Copy
Start key is pressed?
NO
DC controller PCB,
Composite
power
supply PCB
YES
Action
Try a recommended
type. If the results are
good, ask the user to
use a recommended
type.
Check the fixing film
and the fixing lower
roller for scratches. If
there are scratches,
replace them.
See “The fixing heater
fails to turn on.”
The control temperature of the fixing
heater is likely to be
too low. Check the
fixing assembly top
unit, DC controller
PCB, and composite
power supply PCB.
15 The copy has a misplaced leading edge. (extremely excess margin)
16 The copy has a misplaced leading edge. (excess margin)
17 The copy has a misplaced leading edge (no margin)
Cause
Pickup
roller,
Pickup
clutch,
Cassette
Sensor
(PS1), Lightblocking
plate
VR104
Solenoid
(SL2), DC
controller
PCB
Copy paper
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Registration
clutch
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Checks
Make copies using the cassette and
manually. Are the results the same?
Are the scanner home position sensor
(PS1) and the light-blocking plate
normal? (See the instructions on how
to check the photointerrupter.)
Adjust the image leading edge margin.
(p. 11-6) Is the problem corrected?
Does the registration clutch solenoid
(SL2) operate normally?
Is the paper of a recommended type?
YES/NO
NO
Action
Check the pickup
roller, pickup clutch,
and cassette. Or,
replace them.
NO
Replace the sensor, or
check the lightblocking plate.
YES
End.
NO
1. Check the solenoid
(SL2).
2. Check the DC
control PCB.
Try a recommended
type. If the results are
good, ask the user to
use a recommended
type.
Check the registration
clutch.
NO
YES
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-57
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
18 The copy has a blurred image.
Cause
Scanner
drive cable
Step
1
Checks
Does the cable wind on itself when the
scanner is moving? Or, is the cable too
slack or too taut?
YES/NO
YES
Scanner rail
2
Move the No. 1 mirror mount slowly
by hand. Does it move slowly?
NO
---------------
3
Is abnormal noise heard from the
scanner motor?
YES
Feeding
system
Cartridge
4
Does the copy paper spring up or stop
around the transfer assembly?
YES
NO
Action
1. Route the cable
correctly.
2. If the cable is
twisted or frayed,
replace it.
Clean the surface of
the scanner rail with
alcohol. Then, apply
lubricant. (CK-0551)
See "The scanner fails
to move forward/in
reverse."
Check the feeding
assembly for burrs.
Replace the cartridge.
19 The copy has horizontal fogging.
Cause
Scanning
lamp
Cartridge,
High-voltage
transformer
assembly
Scanning
system
Feeding
system
11-58
Step
1
Checks
Does the scanning lamp flicker?
YES/NO
YES
2
Replace the cartridge. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
NO
3
Make a reduced copy, and compare it
against one made in Direct. Is the
problem found at different positions?
YES
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
NO
Action
Replace the scanning
lamp.
End.
Check the highvoltage transformer
(composite power
supply PCB).
Check the scanning
system.
Check the feeding
system.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
20 The copy has poor sharpness. (out-of-focus)
Cause
---------------
Step
1
Checks
Is the image also too light?
YES/NO
YES
Original
2
Is the original off the copyboard glass?
YES
Lens
3
Turn off and then on the power switch.
Does the lens move smoothly?
NO
Mirror
position
4
Is the horizontal ratio in Direct within
specification?
NO
Scanner
Cartridge
5
Clean the scanning lamp, reflecting
plate, mirror, and lens. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
NO
Action
Correct the light
image problem first.
1. Check the
copyboard cover too
see if it happens to
be warping.
2. Instruct the user on
the correct method
of placing originals.
Check the lens rail for
foreign matter, and
clean it.
Adjust the distance
between No. 1 mirror
and the No. 2 mirror.
End.
Replace the cartridge.
21 The copy is blank.
Cause
Cartridge
Drum drive
assembly
High-voltage
transformer
Step
1
Checks
Is the cartridge set in the machine?
YES/NO
NO
2
3
Does the cartridge have toner?
Has the open seal been removed?
YES
NO
4
Set the cartridge in the machine, and
close the machine. Does the drum
cover shutter open properly?
Does the drum drive gear rotate
normally?
Is the primary charging terminal on
the front left of the cartridge in firm
contact with the high-voltage terminal
at the machine's bottom?
NO
5
6
Primary
high-voltage
charging
terminal,
cartridge
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
NO
YES
NO
Action
Set the cartridge in the
machine.
Replace the cartridge.
Remove the opening
seal.
Check the cartridge.
Check the drum drive
assembly.
Check the highvoltage transformer
(composite power
supply PCB).
1. Check the contacts
for electrical continuity.
2. Replace the cartridge
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-59
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
22 The copy is solid black.
Cause
---------------
Step
1
Checks
Does the scanning lamp remain on
during copying?
YES/NO
NO
YES
11-60
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Action
See “The scanning
lamp fails to turn on.”
Is the cartridge set
correctly?
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
IV. TROUBLESHOOTING MALFUNCTIONS
A.
1
Troubleshooting Malfunctions
E0
Cause
----------------
Step
1
Checks
1) Turn off the power, and short JP101
and JP102 on the DC controller
PCB with a screwdriver.
YES/NO
YES
JP102
JP101
JP102
NO
Action
See the instructions
given for the respective error code.
End.
JP101
Figure 11-401
2) While keeping the condition in step
1), turn on the power switch.
3) Is an error code indicated in response to a press on the Copy Start
key?
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-61
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
2
E000
Cause
Thermistor
(TH1)
Step
1
Checks
Are the connection of J102 on the DC
controller PCB and the wiring to the
thermistor (TH1) normal?
YES/NO
NO
Heater,
Fuse (FU2)
2
Is there electrical continuity between
J207-1 and -2 on the fixing heater
side?
NO
Thermistor
(TH1)
Composite
power
supply PCB
DC controller PCB
3
Replace the fixing upper unit. Is the
problem corrected?
Replace the composite power supply
PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES
Action
Correct the connection
of J102 on the DC
controller PCB and the
wiring to the thermistor (TH1).
Check the wiring from
the composite power
supply PCB to the
fixing heater; if
normal, replace the
fixing assembly upper
unit.
End.
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
3
4
E001
Cause
Thermistor
(TH1)
Step
1
Checks
Are the connection of J102 on the DC
controller PCB and the wiring to the
thermistor (TH1) normal?
YES/NO
NO
Thermistor
2
YES
Composite
power
supply PCB
DC controller PCB
3
Replace the fixing assembly upper
unit. Is the problem corrected?
Replace the composite power supply
PCB. Is the problem corrected?
Action
Correct the connection
of J102 on the DC
controller PCB and the
wiring to the thermistor (TH1).
End.
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
11-62
11-62
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
4
E002, E003
Cause
Thermistor
(TH1)
Step
1
Checks
Is the connection of J102 on the DC
controller PCB and the wiring to the
thermistor (TH1) normal?
YES/NO
NO
Heater,
Fuse (FU2)
2
Is there electrical continuity between
J207-1 and -2 on the fixing heater
side?
NO
Thermistor
(TH1)
Composite
power
supply PCB
DC controller PCB
3
Replace the fixing assembly upper
unit. Is the problem corrected?
Replace the composite power supply
PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES
Action
Correct the connection
of J102 on the DC
controller PCB and the
wiring to the thermistor (TH1).
Check the wiring from
the composite power
supply PCB to the
fixing heater; if
normal, replace the
fixing upper unit.
End.
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
5
4
E010
Cause
Wiring 1
Step
1
Checks
Are the connection of J205 on the
composite power supply PCB and the
wiring to the main motor (M1) normal?
YES/NO
NO
Wiring 2
2
NO
DC power
supply
3
Is the wiring from J203 and J202 on
the composite power supply PCB to
J103 and J105, respectively, on the DC
controller PCB normal?
Turn on the power switch. Is the
voltage between J901-1 (+) and -2 (-)
on the main motor drive PCB about 24
V?
Main motor
(M1)
DC controller PCB
4
Replace the main motor (M1). Is the
problem corrected?
YES
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
NO
NO
Action
Correct the connection
of J205 on the composite power supply
PCB and the wiring to
the main motor (M1).
Correct the connection
and wiring of the
connectors.
Check the wiring from
the main motor driver
PCB to the composite
power supply PCB; if
normal, see “DC
power fails to turn
on.”
End.
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-63
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
6
E064
Cause
Wiring
Step
1
Checks
Turn off and then on the power switch;
then, set the copy count to '1'. Is 'E064'
indicated at the end of a copying run?
YES/NO
YES
Action
Check the wiring
between the DC
controller PCB and the
composite power
supply PCB. Check
the wiring between the
composite power
supply PCB and the
high-voltage contact
PCB.
Correct the highvoltage contacts of the
machine's top and
bottom units.
Replace the transfer
charging roller.
High-voltage
contact
2
Is the connection between the highvoltage contacts of the machine's top
and bottom units normal?
NO
Transfer
charging
roller
Primary
charging
roller
High-voltage
cable
Composite
power
supply PCB
DC controller PCB
3
Is the transfer charging roller or the
contact faulty?
YES
4
Replace the cartridge. Is the problem
corrected?
YES
End.
5
Does the high-voltage cable have
scratches or tears?
Replace the composite power supply
PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES
Replace the highvoltage cable.
End.
7
6
YES
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
The keys on the control panel are locked. ('E202')
Cause
----------------
Step
1
Scanner
home position sensor
(PS1)
DC controller PCB
2
Checks
Is the scanner in the home position
when 'E202' turns on?
Is the scanner home position sensor
(PS1) normal? (For instructions on
how to check photointerrupers, see p.
11-47.)
YES/NO
NO
NO
YES
Action
See “The scanner fails
to move forward.”
Check the wiring from
J101 on the DC
controller PCB to PS1;
if normal, replace PS1.
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
11-64
11-64
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
8
E210
Cause
----------------
Step
1
Lens home
position
sensor (PS2)
2
Checks
Does the lens move when the power is
turned on?
Is the lens home position sensor (PS2)
normal? (For instructions on how to
check the photointerrupers, see p. 1147.)
DC controller PCB
9
YES/NO
NO
NO
YES
Action
See “The lens fails to
move.”
Check the wiring from
J109 on the DC
controller PCB to PS2;
if normal, replace PS2.
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
E220
Cause
----------------
Step
1
Composite
power
supply PCB
DC controller PCB
2
Checks
Does the scanning lamp turn on when
the Copy Start key is pressed?
Replace the composite power supply
PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES/NO
NO
YES
NO
Action
See “The scanning
lamp fails to turn on.”
End.
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
10 E240
Cause
Wiring
Composite
power
supply PCB
DC controller PCB
Step
1
2
Checks
Is the wiring from J203 and J204 on
the composite power supply PCB and
J103 and J104, respectively, on the DC
controller PCB normal?
Replace the composite power supply
PCB. Is the problem corrected?
YES/NO
NO
Action
Correct the connection
and the wiring of the
connectors.
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
11 E261
Cause
Power
supply
frequency
Step
1
Composite
power
supply PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Checks
Turn off and then on the power switch.
Is the problem corrected?
YES/NO
YES
NO
Action
End. However, if
‘E261’ occurs frequently, advise the
user to use a frequency
stabilizer.
Replace the composite
power supply PCB.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-65
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
12 E400
5V power
supply
Step
1
Checks
Turn off and then on the power. Is the
probrem corrected?
YES/NO
YES
2
Set the matter to the 20VDC range,
and connect the + probe to the foot of
the push swich on the ADF controller
PCB and the - probe to the copier
ground. Is the voltage about 5V?
NO
F012
A
ON
2
789
1
Action
End. (Check the
wiring between the
copier’s DC controller
PCB and the ADF
controller PCB.)
Replace the ADF
controller PCB.
3456
B CDE
Cause
----------------
Figure 11-402
ADF controller PCB
3
Replace the ADF controller PCB. Is
the problem corrected?
YES
NO
End.
Replace the copier’s
DC controller PCB.
13 E803
Cause
Malfunction
Step
1
DC controller PCB.
Composite
power
supply PCB
2
Checks
Turn off and then on the power switch.
Is the problem corrected?
Replace the DC controller PCB. Is the
problem corrected?
YES/NO
YES
End.
Action
YES
End.
NO
Replace the composite
power supply PCB.
11-66
11-66
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
14 AC power fails to turn on.
Cause
Power plug
Step
1
----------------
2
Machine top
unit
Power
supply
3
Fuse
(FU501)
5
Fuse
(FU102)
6
Door switch
(DS1)
7
Noise filter
PCB
Harness
8
Connector
connection 1
4
Checks
Is the power plug connected to the
power outlet?
Turn on the power switch. Is ‘E0’
indicated in the display?
Is the machine’s top unit closed
firmly?
Is the rated voltage present at the
power outlet?
YES/NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
Is the fuse (FU501) on the noise filter
PCB blown?
120V model:
250 V, 15 A
220/240V model: 250 V, 6.3 A
Is the fuse (FU102) on the composite
power supply PCB blown?
120V model:
125 V, 5 A
220/240V model: 250 V, 2.5 A
Remove the door switch (DS1), and
connect the meter probes to F1 and F3
or F2 and F4 of the faston of the door
switch. Is the resistance about 0 Ω
when the actuator is pressed add about
∞ Ω when it is released?
Is the rated voltage present between
J501-1 and -2?
Is the rated voltage present between
J201-1 and J201-2?
YES
10
Is there electrical continuity between
J111-15 on the DC controller PCB and
J301-15 on the control panel PCB?
NO
Connector
connection 2
11
Is there electrical continuity between
J204-1 on the composite power supply
PCB and J104-7 on the DC controller
PCB?
NO
Control
panel PCB
Composite
power
supply PCB
12
Replace the control panel PCB.Is the
problem corrected?
YES
9
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Action
Connect the power
plug.
See the descriptions
under “E0.”
Close the machine's
top unit.
Inform the user that
the problem is not the
machine’s.
Remove the cause, and
replace the fuse.
YES
Remove the cause of
the problem, and
replace the fuse.
NO
Replace the door
switch (DS1).
NO
Replace the noise
filter PCB.
Check the connectors
and the wiring if they
are normal.
Correct the electrical
continuity of J111 on
the DC controller PCB
and J301 on the
control panel PCB.
Check the connection
of J104 on the DC
controller PCB and
J204 on the composite
power supply PCB; if
normal, replace the
DC controller PCB.
End.
NO
NO
Replace the composite
power supply PCB.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-67
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
15 DC power fails to turn on.
Cause
AC power
supply
Step
1
Wiring, DC
load
2
Checks
Is AC power present between J201-1
and -2 on the composite power supply
PCB?
Turn off the power switch, and disconnect J202 and J205 from the composite
power supply PCB.
Set the meter range to 30 VDC, and
turn on the power switch. Is the
voltage between the following terminals normal?
Connector
J202
J205
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
Output
GND
24V
5V
5V
GND
24V
GND
24V
YES/NO
NO
Action
See “AC power fails
to turn on.”
YES
See the descriptions
under “E0.”
YES
Remove the cause of
the problem, and
replace the fuse.
Replace the composite
power supply PCB.
Remarks
To DC
controller
PCB
To main
motor
driver
PCB
Table 11-401
Fuse
Composite
power
supply PCB
3
Is the fuse (FU102) on the composite
power supply PCB blown?
120V model:
125 V, 5 V
220/240V model: 250 V, 2.5 A
NO
11-68
11-68
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
16 Pickup fails. (cassette)
Cause
Main motor
(M1)
Cassette
Step
1
2
Checks
Does the main motor (M1) rotate when
the Copy Start key is pressed?
Is the cassette set correctly?
YES/NO
NO
NO
Paper in
cassette
3
Is the paper in the cassette placed
correctly?
NO
Pickup
clutch
solenoid
(SL1),
Cassette
pickup
solenoid
(SL5)
4
Set the meter range to 30 VDC, and
connect the meter probes to the following terminals. Does the voltage
change to about 24 V in keeping with
pickup operation?
NO
Pickup clutch
solenoid (SL1)
Cassette pickup
solenoid (SL5)
+
-
J109-4
J109-3
J132-2
J132-1
Action
See “The main motor
fails to rotate.”
Set the cassette correctly.
Instruct the user on the
correct method of
placing paper.
Check the wiring from
the solenoid to the DC
controller PCB; if
normal, replace the
solenoid.
Table 11-402
Cassette
spring
DC controller PCB
5
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Is the force of the cassette spring
within specification? (See p. 11-10.)
NO
YES
Replace the cassette
spring.
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-69
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
17 Pickup fails. (multifeeder)
Cause
Wrong
operation
Step
1
Main motor
(M1)
Paper placement
2
Multifeeder
pickup
solenoid
(SL4),
Pickup
clutch
solenoid
(SL1)
DC controller PCB
4
3
Checks
Is the multifeeder selected on the
control panel?
YES/NO
NO
Does the main motor (M1) rotate when
the Copy Start key is pressed?
Is the paper placed in the multifeeder
correctly?
NO
Set the meter range to 30 VDC, and
connect the meter probes as indicated.
Does the voltage change to about 24 V
in keeping with pickup operation?
NO
Multifeeder
pickup solenoid
(SL4)
Pickup clutch
solenoid (SL1)
+
-
J109-8
J109-7
NO
YES
J109-4
J109-3
Action
Instruct the user on the
correct way of operating the machine.
See “The main motor
fails to rotate.”
Instruct the user on the
correct way of placing
paper.
Check the wiring from
the solenoid to the DC
controller PCB; if
normal, replace the
solenoid in question.
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
Table 11-403
18 Pickup fails. (single-feeder)
Cause
Main motor
(M1)
Single-feeder
paper sensor
(PS5)
Step
1
2
Checks
Does the main motor rotate when the
Copy Start key is pressed?
Is the single-feeder paper sensor (PS5)
normal?
DC controller PCB
YES/NO
NO
NO
YES
Action
See “The main motor
fails to rotate.”
Check the wiring from
J113 to PS5 on the DC
control PCB; if normal, replace PS5.
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
11-70
11-70
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
19 The scanner fails to move forward.
Cause
Cable
Step
1
Scanner path
2
Composite
power
supply PCB
3
Pre-registration roller
paper sensor
(Q751)
4
Scanner/lens
drive motor
(M2)
DC controller
PCB
5
Checks
Is the scanner drive cable routed
correctly?
Is the scanner rail soiled?
Move the scanner by hand. Does it
move smoothly?
YES/NO
NO
NO
Set the meter range to 30 VDC, and
connect the meter probes to J202-2 (+)
and -1 (-) on the composite power
supply PCB. Is the meter reading
about 24 V?
Is the pre-registration roller paper
sensor (Q751) normal? (For instructions on how to check the
photointerrupers, see p. 11-47.)
NO
Replace the scanner/lens drive motor
(M2). Is the problem corrected?
YES
NO
NO
Action
Route the cable
correctly.
Check the surface of
the scanner rail for
dirt, foreign matter, or
object which may
interfere.
See “DC power fails
to turn on.”
Check the wiring from
J108 on the DC
controller PCB to
Q751; if normal,
replace Q751.
End.
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
20 The registration roller fails to rotate.
Cause
Main motor
(M1)
Step
1
Checks
Does the main motor (M1) start to
rotate when the Copy Start key is
pressed?
Is the pre-registration roller paper
sensor (Q751) normal? (For instructions on how to check the
photointerrupers, see p. 11-47.)
Yes/No
No
Pre-registration roller
paper sensor
(Q751)
2
Registration
roller spring
clutch
3
Does the registration clutch solenoid
(SL2) turn on for a moment after the
Copy Start key is pressed?
No
Registration
clutch
solenoid
(SL2)
DC controller PCB
4
Set the meter range to 30 VDC. Does
the voltage between J109-6 (+) and -5
(-) on the DC controller PCB change
to about 24 V for a moment after the
Copy Start key is pressed?
Yes
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
No
No
Action
See “The main motor
fails to rotate.”
Check the wiring from
J108 on the DC
controller PCB to
Q751; if normal,
replace Q751.
Check the position of
the solenoid; if normal, check or replace
the control ring.
Check the wiring from
J109 on the DC
controller PCB to SL2;
if normal, replace SL2.
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-71
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
21 The blanking lamp fails to turn on.
Cause
Side blanking PCB
Step
1
DC controller PCB
Checks
Remove J106 from the DC control
PCB, and set the meter range to 1 kΩ;
then, connect the meter probes to
J106-1 and -2 on the harness side. Is
the meter reading about 20 Ω?
YES/NO
NO
YES
Action
Check the harness; if
normal, replace the
side blanking PCB.
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
22 The scanning lamp fails to turn on.
Cause
Scanning
lamp
Step
1
Fuse (FU1)
2
Lamp
3
DC controller PCB
Composite
power
supply PCB
4
Checks
Turn off the power switch, and disconnect the power plug from the power
outlet.Is the scanning lamp (LA1)
mounted correctly?
Set the meter range to 1 kΩ, and
connect the meter probes to both
terminals of the fuse (FU1). Does the
index of the meter swing?
Disconnect the connector J910 from th
ecomposite power supply PCB, and set
the tester range to 1kΩ.
Does the tester index swing when the
probes are connected to J910-1 and
J910-3 on the lamp side?
Replace the DC controller PCB. Is the
problem corrected?
YES/NO
NO
Action
Mount the scanning
lamp correctly.
NO
Replace the fuse
(FU1).
NO
Check the cable from
the composite power
supply PCB to the
lamp; if normal,
replace the lamp.
YES
End.
NO
Check the wiring
between the DC
controller PCB and the
composite power
supply PCB; if normal, replace the
composite power
supply PCB.
11-72
11-72
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
23 The lens fails to turn on.
Cause
Lens solenoid (SL3)
Step
1
Checks
Does the lens solenoid (SL3) turn on
when the power switch is turned on?
YES/NO
NO
Lens cable,
Pulley, Rail
2
Are the lens cable, pulley, and rail
normal?
NO
DC power
supply
3
NO
Scanner/lens
drive motor
(M2)
DC control
PCB
4
Set the meter range to the 30 VDC,
and connect J202-2 (+) and -1 (-) on
the composite power supply PCB. Is
the meter reading about 24 V?
Replace the scanner/lens drive motor
(M2). Is the problem corrected?
Action
Check the wiring from
J109 on the DC
controller PCB to SL3;
if normal, replace SL3.
Check the lens cable,
pulley, and rail; as
necessary, clean the
cable and adjust its
tension.
See “DC power fails
to turn on.”
YES
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
24 The fixing heater fails to turn on.
Cause
----------------
Step
1
DC controller PCB
Composite
power
supply PCB
2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Checks
Is 'E0' indicated?
Replace the DC controller PCB. Is the
problem corrected?
YES/NO
YES
YES
NO
Action
See the descriptions
under “E0.”
End.
Replace the composite
power supply PCB.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-73
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
25 The "Add Paper" message fails to turn off.
Cause
Cassette
Step
1
Checks
Is the cassette set correctly?
YES/NO
NO
Lens cable,
Pulley, Rail
2
Are the lens cable, pulley, and rail
normal?
NO
DC power
supply
3
NO
Vertical path
roller paper
sensor (PS4)
4
Set the meter range to 30 VDC, and
connect the meter probes to J202-2 (+)
and -1 (-) on the composite power
PCB. Is the meter reading about 24 V?
Is the vertical path roller paper sensor
(PS4) normal? (For instructions on
how to check the photointerrupters,
see p. 11-47.)
Control
panel PCB
DC controller PCB
5
Replace the control panel PCB. Is the
problem corrected?
YES
NO
Action
Set the cassette correctly.
Check the lens cable,
pulley, and rail; as
necessary, clean the
cable and adjust its
tension.
See “The DC power
fails to turn on.”
Check the wiring from
J132 on the DC
controller PCB to PS4;
if normal, replace the
PS4.
End.
NO
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
YES/NO
YES
Action
Remove the jam
paper.
26 The "Jam" message fails to turn off.
Cause
Jam paper
Sensor
Step
1
2
Checks
Is the jam paper near any of the
following sensors?
• Vertical path roller paper sensor
(PS4)
• Single-feeder paper sensor (PS5)
• Pre-registration roller paper sensor
(Q751)
• Delivery sensor (PS3)
Is the sensor checked in step 1 normal? (For instructions on how to check
the photointerrupers, see p. 11-47.)
DC controller PCB
NO
YES
Check the wiring from
the DC controller PCB
to each sensor; if
normal, replace the
sensor in question.
Replace the DC
controller PCB.
11-74
11-74
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING PROBLEMS
A.
Copy Paper Jam
Inside the machine, jams tend occur in the following blocks:
[1] Pickup block
[2] Separation/feeding block
[3] Fixing/delivery block
The troubleshooting procedures that follow are organized according to the location of a jam.
[3]
[2]
[1]
Figure 11-501
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-75
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
1
Pickup Assembly
Cause
----------------
Cassette
2
Checks
Does the problem occur when the
cassette is selected as the source of
paper?
Is the cassette set correctly?
Copy paper
3
Is the copy paper curled or wavy?
YES
Copy paper
4
YES
DC controller PCB,
Pickup
clutch
Registration
roller drive
assembly
Vertical path
roller paper
sensor (PS4)
Pickup
roller,
Vertical path
roller, Roll
5
Try paper recommended by Canon. Is
the problem corrected?
Does the pickup roller of the pickup
assembly of the selected source
(cassette, manual feeder) rotate during
a copying run?
Does the registration roller operate
normally?
NO
See “The registration
roller fails to rotate.”
Does the vertical path roller paper
sensor operate normally?
NO
Replace the sensor or
the lever.
YES
Check the roller for
wear and deformation,
and the roll for attachment.
11-76
Step
1
6
7
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
YES/NO
NO
NO
NO
Action
Go to step 5.
Set the cassette correctly.
Replace the copy
paper. Instruct the user
on the correct method
of storing paper.
Ask the user to use
recommended paper.
See “Pickup fails” for
the source of paper in
question.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
2
Separation/Feeding Assembly
Cause
Copy paper
Step
1
2
Checks
Try paper recommended by Canon. Is
the problem corrected?
Is the copy paper curled, wavy, or
otherwise deformed?
Is there foreign matter in the feeding
assembly?
YES/NO
YES
YES
Feeding
assembly
3
Feed belt,
Roller
Static eliminator
Pre-registration roller
paper sensor
(Q751)
Registration
roller
4
Is the feed belt rotating properly?
NO
5
Is the static eliminator soiled with
toner or the like?
Does the pre-registration roller paper
sensor operate normally?
YES
Is the registration roller worn, deformed, or soiled?
YES
6
7
Registrationrelated
spring,
Spring clutch
of registration assembly
3
YES
NO
NO
Action
Ask the user to use
recommended paper.
Replace the paper.
Instruct the user on the
correct method of
storing paper.
Remove the foreign
matter.
Check the belt and the
roller.
Replace the sensor or
the lever.
Clean the static
eliminator.
If dirt is found, clean
with alcohol; if wear
or deformation is
found, replace it.
1. Check the spring
used to control
registration.
2. Check the spring
clutch of the registration assembly.
Fixing/Delivery Assembly
Cause
Inlet guide
Fixing lower
roller, Fixing
film
Delivery
paper detecting lever
Delivery
sensor (PS3)
Delivery
roller drive
assembly
Leading
edge margin
Step
1
2
Checks
Is the fixing inlet guide soiled with
toner?
Is the fixing lower roller or the fixing
film deformed or scratched?
YES/NO
YES
YES
3
Does the delivery detecting lever
move smoothly?
NO
4
Does the delivery sensor operate
normally?
Does the delivery roller operate
smoothly?
NO
5
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Action
Clean the guide with
solvent.
Replace the roller or
the fixing assembly
upper unit.
Make adjustments so
that it moves
smoothly.
Replace the sensor.
NO
Check the delivery
roller drive assembly.
YES
Check the leading
edge of copy paper for
margin.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-77
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
B.
1
Faulty Feeding
Double-Feeding
Cause
Cassette
Step
1
2
3
Copy paper
4
Checks
Is the copy paper placed under the
claw properly?
Push down the copy paper inside the
cassette. Does it move up when let go
with its end coming under the claw?
YES/NO
NO
Is the sheets of paper placed in the
cassette uneven?
Is the paper of a type recommended by
Canon?
YES
Claw (cassette)
2
NO
NO
YES
Action
Place the copy paper
properly.
1. Check the copy
paper width.
2. Check the position
of the side guide
plate of the cassette.
(universal cassette
only)
3. Measure the force
of the spring of the
cassette; if faulty,
replace the cassette
spring.
Even out the sheets in
the cassette.
Ask the user to use
recommended paper.
Check the claw for
deformation.
Wrinkles
Cause
Pickup
assembly,
Vertical path
roller,
Registration
roller
Copy paper
Fixing
assembly
Inlet guide
11-78
Step
1
Checks
Turn off the power while copy paper is
moving through the feeding assembly.
Is the copy paper wrinkled or found
askew?
YES/NO
YES
2
Try fresh paper. Is the problem corrected?
YES
3
Try paper of a type recommended by
Canon. Is the problem corrected?
Is the inlet guide soiled with toner?
YES
4
NO
YES
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Action
• Check the pickup
assembly.
• Check the vertical
path roller.
• Check the registration roller.
The paper is moist.
Instruct the user on the
correct method of
storing paper.
Ask the user to use
recommended paper.
Check the fixing
assembly.
Clean the inlet guide
with solvent.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
VI. ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF
ELECTRICAL PARTS
A.
Sensors and Solenoids
SL3
PS2
SL4
SL1
SL2
PS5
SL5
PS4
PS1
Q751
PS3
Figure 11-601
Symbol
Name
Photointerrupters
PS
Notation
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
Solenoid
SL
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Description
Scanner home position detection
Lens home position detection
Delivery assembly paper detection
Vertical path assembly paper
detection
Single-feeder paper detection
Q751
Pre-registration roller paper detection
SL1
SL2
SL3
SL4
Pickup clutch solenoid
Registration clutch solenoid
Lens solenoid
Multifeeder pickup solenoid
SL5
Cassette pickup solenoid
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Remarks
Single-feeder
type only
Multifeeder
type only
11-79
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
B.
Switches
SW309
DS1
SW101
Figure 11-602
Symbol
11-80
Name
Switch
Notation
DS1
SW309
Description
Door switch
Power switch
Switch
SW101
Density correction switch
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Remarks
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
C.
Lamp, Heater, Motor, Etc.
M1
M2
LA1
TH2
FU1
VZ2
FU2
H1
VZ1
TH1
FM1
Figure 11-603
Symbol
Name
Lamp
Notation
LA1
Description
Scanning lamp
Heater
H1
Fixing heater
Motor
M1
M2
Main motor
Scanner/lens drive motor
Fan motor
FM1
Scanner cooling fan
Thermistor
TH1
TH2
Fixing heater temperature detection
Scanner temperature detection
Thermal fuse
FU1
FU2
Lamp overheating detection
Fixing heater overheating detection
Varistor
VZ1
VZ2
Fixing film varistor
Transfer guide varistor
M
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Remarks
11-81
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
D.
PCBs
[9]
[8]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[6]
[7]
Figure 11-604
Ref.
[1]
[2]
[3]
Name
Noise filter PCB
DC controller PCB
Composite power supply PCB
[4]
High-voltage contact PCB
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Control panel PCB
Sensor PCB
AE sensor PCB
Blanking PCB (front)
Blanking PCB (rear)
11-82
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Description
Removes noise from the power supply.
Controls sequence of operations.
Supplies DC power, generates high voltage, and
controls the scanning lamp.
Makes an electrical connection between the machine
top and bottom.
Provides copying insurrections/indications.
Detects paper in front of the registration roller.
Detects the density of originals.
Used for blanking exposure.
Used for blanking exposure.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
E.
ADF
M2
M1
[1]
PI3
PI2
MS1
PI1
Figure 11-605
Symbol
Name
Photointerrupter
Notation
PI1
PI2
PI3
Description
Delivery paper detection
Registration roller paper detection
Original placement detection
Microswitch
MS1
ADF open/close switch
Motor
M1
M2
Belt motor
Pickup motor
PS
M
[1]
ADF controller
PCB
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Remarks
Controls sequence of operations
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-83
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
F.
Variable Resistors (VR) and Check Pins by PCB
Of the variable resistors (VR) and check pins, those needed in the field are discussed herein.
Those not found in the discussions are for the factory only, requiring special tools and adjustment
to an extremely accuracy. Do not touch them in the field.
Caution:
VRs that may be used in the field ................
VRs that must not be used in the field .........
1.
DC Controller PCB
1
2
3
8
J130
J101
1
2
1
9
JP102
J114
1
JP101
J102
19
18 J111
VR104
1
5
2
6 J2012
J111
VR106
J131
CP23
VR105
1
VR107
VR103
VR102
J107
1
J104
J103
4 1
J105
8 1
7
6
1 1
GND
J106
11
1
J132
2 1
6
1
7
JP103 J108
JP104
J109
1
J113
5 1
SW101
1
3
Figure 11-606
2.
Composite Power Supply PCB
1
1 J203 8 1 J204 7
6
J202
J207
J201
2
1
VR801
1 2
2
VR001
1
VR301
J910
J302
J209
FU102
J205
1
J213
4
J212
Figure 11-607
11-84
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
3.
ADF Controller PCB
FACE
Soldered side
7
1
10
TP1
1
J3
J5
1
9
1
J2
8
4
J1
1
CB1
2
1
J6
ON
1 2
PSW
SW1
SW2
Figure 11-608
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-85
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
VII. SELF DIAGNOSIS
The microprocessor on the machine’s DC controller PCB is equipped with a self diagnostic
mechanism that checks the condition of the machine (particularly, sensors) and indicates an error
code in the count/ratio indicator on the control panel upon detection of a fault.
In the case of ‘E001’, ‘E0’ and ‘01’ are flashed alternately.
Code
Cause
‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, or ‘E003’ has
occurred.
•
•
•
•
•
The thermistor (TH1) is faulty.
The fixing heater (H1) is faulty.
The thermal fuse (FU2) has blown.
The DC controller PCB is faulty.
The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.
• The thermistor (TH1) is faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
11-86
The thermistor (TH1) is faulty.
The fixing heater (H1) is faulty.
The thermal fuse (FU2) has blown.
The DC controller PCB is faulty.
The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.
The thermistor (TH1) is faulty.
The fixing heater (H1) is faulty.
The thermal fuse (FU2) has blown.
The DC controller PCB is faulty.
The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Description
The power switch is turned off and then
on immediately after an error (‘E000’,
‘E001’, ‘E002’, ‘E003’) has occurred.
• The temperature detected by the
thermistor (TH1) does not reach 65°C
1.5 sec after the Copy Start key has
been pressed.
• The temperature detected by the
thermistor (TH1) does not reach 150°C
4 sec after the Copy Start key has been
pressed.
• The temperature detected by the
thermistor (TH1) exceeds 230°C.
• The temperature detected by the
thermistor (TH1) exceeds by 30°C or
more.
• The temperature detected by the
thermistor (TH1) registers an increase
of 100°C or more within 1 sec.
• The temperature detected by the
thermistor (TH1) registers an increase
of 40°C or more after it has reached
100°C during standby.
• E0 detection signal (E0_DT) is detected twice or more in succession.
• The temperature detected by the
thermistor (TH1) has exeeded 150°C
during copy operation and maximum
power is applied for 10 to 14 sec
thereafter.
• The temperature detected by the
thermistor (TH1) drops to and remains
150°C or lower after it has reached
160°C.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Code
Cause
• The main motor (M1) is fault.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
(
)
The keys on the
control panel
are locked
without error
code indication.
• The scanner home position sensor
(PS1) is faulty.
• The scanner/lens drive motor (M2)
is faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The lens home position sensor
(PS2) is faulty.
• The scanner/lens drive motor (M2)
is faulty.
• The lens cable is faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The scanning lamp (LA1) is faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.
• The frequency of the power supply
is faulty.
• The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.
• Data communication between the
copier and the ADF (faulty).
• The DC controller PCB is faulty.
• The composite power supply PCB is
faulty.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Description
• The rotation of the main motor deviates
(indicated by MLOCK=0) for 1 sec or
more while the main motor drive signal
(MMD=1) is being generated.
• The actual output value of the composite power supply high voltage is different from the setting value twice in
succession.
• The scanner home position is not
detected within 10 sec after the scanner
has turned on.
• The scanner does not leave the home
position after it has turned on.
• The lens hoe position is not detected
after the lens has moved the maximum
travel distance.
• The lens does not leave the home
position after it has turned on.
• The lamp ON detection signal is not
detected for 1 sec or more in the
presence of the scanning lamp On
signal.
• The lamp ON detection signal is
detected for 1 sec or more in the
absence of the scanning lamp ON
signal.
• A fault in the communication between
DC controller PCB and composite
power supply PCB is detected.
• The interval between zero-cross signals
is in excess of the allowed interval.
• The communication with the copier is
interrupted for 5 sec or more; the
communication is monitored at all
times.
• During a copying run, the +24 V power
deviates from the control value by
±20%.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
11-87
CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING
JP102
JP101
JP102
Caution:
1. If the self-diagnosis has turned on, turn off the power switch to reset the machine.
In the case of ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, or ‘E003’, however, the machine must be reset as
follows: this consideration is to prevent feeding power to the fixing heater otherwise occurring if the thermistor has an open circuit:
2. In the case of ‘E0’, ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, ‘E003’, or ‘E220’, the machine will turn off in
1.5 sec for ‘E0’ and ‘E000’ through ‘E003’ and in 2 sec for ‘E220’.
3. In the case of ‘E0’, ‘E000’, ‘E001’, ‘E002’, or ‘E003’, perform the following steps:
1) Turn off the power switch, and short circuit JP101 and JP102 on the DC controller PCB
with a screwdriver or the like.
JP101
Figure 11-701
2) While keeping the condition in step 1), turn on the power switch.
3) Stop short-circuiting JP101 and JP102.
11-88
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
APPENDIX
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ........ A-1
B. SIGNALS AND
ABBREVIATIONS ....................... A-3
C. GENERAL CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................... A-5
D. DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................... A-7
E. ADF CONTROLLER CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-15
F. COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-19
G. CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-27
H. AE SENSOR CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-29
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
SENSOR CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-30
NOISE FILTER CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM ................................. A-31
HIGH VOLTAGE CONTACT
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-32
BLANK EXPOSURE (front)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-33
BLANK EXPOSURE (rear)
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................. A-34
SPECIAL TOOLS ...................... A-35
SOLVENTS/OILS ...................... A-36
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
(A4, 2 copies, DIRECT, from cassette)
A. GENERAL TIMING CHART
Power switch
ON
Sequence
1.
Copy Start key
ON
STBY
INTR
AER
SCFW
SCRV
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
COPYBOARD TYPE
STBY
1
Main motor (M1)
2 Scanner / lens drive
motor (M2)
3 Scanner home position
sensor (PS1)
4 Lens home position
sensor (PS2)
5
Lens solenoid (SL3)
6 Pickup clutch solenoid
(SL1)
7 Cassette pickup
solenoid (SL5)
8 Vertical path roller
paper sensor (PS4)
9 Registration clutch
solenoid (SL2)
10 Pre-registration roller
paper sensor (Q751)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Scanning lamp (LA1)
Primary AC bias
Primary DC bias
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Transfer bias
Static eliminator bias
18
Fixing heater (H1)
19 Scanner cooling fan
(FM1)
20
Delivery sensor (PS3)
: Scanner / lens drive motor (reverse)
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-1
Copy Start key
Power switch
ON
ON Original set
2. ADF TYPE
Sequence
1
Pickup motor (M2)
2
Belt motor (M1)
4
Original detection
sensor (PI3)
Registration paper
sensor (PI2)
5
Delivery sensor (PI1)
1
Main motor (M1)
ADF 3
4
Scanner / lens drive
motor (M2)
Scanner home position
sensor (PS1)
Lens home position
sensor (PS2)
5
Lens solenoid (SL3)
2
3
STBY
INTR
(A4, 2 copies, DIRECT, from cassette)
ORGST
SCFW
SCRV
ORGST
SCFW
SCRV
LSTR
STBY
Preparing for
pickup
Pickup clutch solenoid
(SL1)
Cassette pickup solenoid
7 (SL5)
Vertical path roller
8 paper sensor (PS4)
Registration clutch
9
solenoid (SL2)
Pre-registration roller
10
paper sensor (Q751)
6
Copier
11 Scanning lamp (LA1)
12 Primary AC bias
13 Primary DC bias
14 Developing AC bias
15 Developing DC bias
16 Transfer bias
17 Static eliminator bias
18 Fixing heater (H1)
19 Scanner cooling fan
(FM1)
20 Delivery sensor (PS3)
: Scanner / lens drive motor (reverse) / Pickup motor (reverse) / Belt motor (reverse)
A-2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS
What follows below is a list of signals and abbreviations used in the chapters of the manual and circuit diagrams.
The abbreviations within parentheses represent analog signals, which cannot be expressed in terms of ‘1’ or ‘0’.
1. Signals
ACBIAS
[AE]
AEREF
BIAS_PWM
BIAS_S
CLK32K
CPUSD
DPD
DV_AC_ON
DV_DC_ON
E0_DT
FM1D
HEAT_ERR
HEAT_OFF
HEAT_PWM
HEAT_TRG
LAMP_DETECT
LAMP_ON
LHP
LNSLD
MFSLD
MLOCK
MMCLK
MMD
PAC_OUT
PAC_S
PDC_PWM
PDC_S
PDP
PR_DC_ON
PUSLD
PWM_1KHz
PWOFF
RGSLD
RLOFF
RPD
SB_LP
SC_A
SC_B
SC_COM
SCHP
SFPD
T_FEEDBACK
T_FW_DRV
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
AC BIAS OSCILLATION signal
AE SENSOR OUTPUT signal
AE SENSOR REFERENCE signal
DC BIAS CONTROL signal
DC BIAS MONITOR signal
TRANSFORMER CONTROL signal
CASSETTE PICKUP SOLENOID DRIVE signal
DELIVERY PAPER DETECTION signal
DEVELOPING AC BIAS ON signal
DEVELOPING DC BIAS ON signal
E0 DETECTION signal
SCANNER COOLING FAN DRIVE signal
FIXING HEATER ERROR signal
FIXING HEATER OFF signal
FIXING HEATER DUTY signal
FIXING HEATER DRIVE signal
LAMP ACTIVATION DETECTION signal
SCANNING LAMP ACTIVATION signal
LENS HOME POSITION signal
LENS SOLENOID DRIVE signal
MULTIFEEDER PICKUP SOLENOID DRIVE signal
MAIN MOTOR CONSTANT SPEED signal
MAIN MOTOR CLOCK PULSE signal
MAIN MOTOR DRIVE signal
PRIMARY CORONA AC BIAS signal
PRIMARY CORONA AC DETECTION signal
DC BIAS CONTROL signal
DC VOLTAGE MONITOR signal
VERTICAL PATH ROLLER PAPER DETECTION signal
PRIMARY CHARGING DC BIAS ON signal
PICKUP CLUTCH SOLENOID DRIVE signal
SCANNING LAMP INTENSITY ADJUSTMENT signal
POWER SWITCH OFF signal
REGISTRATION CLUTCH SOLENOID DRIVE signal
RELAY DRIVE signal
PRE-REGISTRATION ROLLER PAPER DETECTION signal
SIDE BLANK EXPOSURE LAMP ON signal
SCANNER MOTOR PULSE signal A
SCANNER MOTOR PULSE signal B
SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE signal
SCANNER HOME POSITION signal
SINGLE-FEEDER PAPER DETECTION signal
TRANSFER BIAS VOLTAGE DETECTION signal
TRANSFER DC BIAS CONTROL signal
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
T_FW_ON
T_FW_S
T_REV_ON
TH1
TH2
TRANSFER DC BIAS ON signal
TRANSFER CURRENT DETECTION signal
TRANSFER POSITIVE DC BIAS ON signal
FIXING THERMISTOR signal
SCANNER THERMISTOR signal
2. Abbreviations
AER
INTR
LSTR
SCFW
SCRV
STBY
AE (MEASUREMENT) ROTATION
INITIAL ROTATION
LAST ROTATION
SCANNER FORWARD
SCANNER REVERSE
STANDBY
A-3
A-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
C.
Fixing heater
H1
Thermal fuse 1
FU1
FT2
N
FT4
FT1
J1
FT3
DS1
Door switch
J502
J501
2
1
2
1
J17
J434
NF1
FT5
FT2
N
FT1
J1
FT4
JP502
J501
FT3
JP501
2
1
M
1 1
2 2
FU2
Thermal fuse 2
NOISE FILTER PCB
[120V]
H
J2
Main motor
M1
1
2
3
4
FT6
J15
Copier
J901
+24VU
GND
MMD
MLOCK
H
Line filter
LF1
1
2
Scanning lamp
LA1
1.
MAIN MOTOR DRIVER PCB
J16
[220/240V]
GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3
2 1
4 3 2 1
J910
J207
J205
J501F
BP701
BP705
PR
BP703
BP707
DV
J209
2
1
2
1
J201
BP702
J14
BP706
J212
DS1
Door switch
COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY PCB
NF1
J11
NOISE FILTER PCB
J12
BP704
J213
VZ2
Varistor 2
HVT BOARD 2
T302
AE SENSOR PCB
HVT BOARD 1
Scanner home
position sensor
PS1
AE
J601
4 3 2 1
J301 1 2 3
Scanner
thermistor
TH2
J202
1 2 3 4 5 6
Scanner
cooling fan
FM1
J204
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J15
SP
TR
J13
Fixing thermistor
TH1
J62
1 2 3 4
4 3 2 1
J601
J203
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
To ADF
TH1
DIG1
HEAT0
DIG1
HEAT1
GND
DIG3
GND
DPD
PWOFF
S_IN
S_OUT
S_CLK
ZER_CRS
HEAT_TRG
MLOCK
RLOFF*
ACK*
MMD
CPS_REQ
PR_DC_ON
DV_DC_ON
DV_AC_ON
STBY/CPY*
GND
+24VU
+5V
+5V
GND
+24VR
+24VU
FM1D*
TH2
GND
SCHP
GND
+5V
GND
AFREF
AE
+24VR
J24F
1 2 3 4
3 2 1
1 2
1 2
6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J107
J101
J131
J130
J105
J103
J104
J102
J433
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Delivery sensor
PS3
3
2
1
J61
DC CONTROLLER PCB
2 1
1 2
J51
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
J58
J53
J54
2 1
1 2
J55
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J56 3 2 1
SL
SL3
Lens
solenoid
SL1
Pickup clutch
solenoid
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
SL
J57 3 2 1
3 2 1
SL2
SL4
Registration
Multifeeder
clutch solenoid pickup solenoid
(Multifeeder
type only)
PS2
PS5
Lens home
Single-feeder
position sensor paper sensor
(Single-feeder
type only)
M
DIG0
DIG1
DIG2
DIG3
SEG0*
SEG1*
SEG2*
SEG3*
SEG4*
SEG5*
SEG6*
SEG7*
KR0
KR1
PWOFF
GND
+5V
DSVR
DIG4
1 2
1 2
J601
J602
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
J301
2
1
M2
Scanner/lens
drive motor
SIDE BLANK EXPOSURE PCB
J59 3 2 1
SL
SL
J111
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
J106
1 2
SB_LP*
+24VU
RPD
+5V
GND
J751
To ADF
3 2 1
1 2 3
Q751
Pre-registration roller
paper sensor
SL
J110
1 2 3 4 5 6
2 1
1 2
J60
2 1
1 2
J108
1 2 3 4 5
SC_COM
SC_B*
SC_B
SC_COM
SC_A*
SC_A
J114
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
REQ
GND
ACK
GND
TXD
GND
RXD
GND
LNSLD*
+24VU
PUSLD*
+24VU
RGSLD*
+24VU
MFSLD*
+24VU
GND
LHP
+5V
J52
J132
1 2 3 4 5
CPUSD*
+24VU
+5V
GND
PDP
J113
1 2 3
DIG2
GND
SFPD
J109
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
SL5
Cassette
pickup solenoid
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
J302
J303
Power switch
SENSOR PCB
PS4
Vertical path roller
paper sensor
CONTROL PANEL PCB
1
2
Fixing film
J3
VZ1
Varistor 1
J4
A-5
ADF
Registration
sensor
Original placement
sensor
PI2
PI1
Delivery
sensor
3 2 1
PI3
2.
3 2 1
3 2 1
J202
J203
BR
BL
V
BR
BL
V
J201
2 1
2 1
Pickup motor
M1
Belt motor
+5V
GND
PDP1
+5V
GND
PDP2*
+5V
GND
PDP3*
M1
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
J105
BR
BL
Y
BR
BL
V
BR
BL
GY
1 2 3 4 5 6
6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
J5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J3
OR
GN
Y
V
GY
W
OR
A-6
J23
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J2
J1
J6
Color coding
BK BLACK
BL BLUE
BR BROWN
GY GRAY
GN GREEN
OR ORANGE
PK PINK
R RED
SB SKY-BLUE
V VIOLET
W WHITE
Y YELLOW
2 1
2 1
ADFC
+24V
BL
BR
GN
OR
J24
OR
OR
GNDL
+5V
GNDD
+24V
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
2 1 4 5
FG
(M3)
BL
W
BL
GY
BL
V
BL
Y
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
J202
To composite power supply
GNDL
RxD
GNDL
TxD
GNDL
ACK
GNDL
REQ
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J114
To DC controller
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ADF CONTROLLER PCB
NO
COM
Y/GN
(M4)
ADF
Switch
MS1
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
D.
DC CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
DC Controller Circuit Diagram (1/8)
ZER_CRS_LEVEL
E0_BUCK
D_L_1
FM1D
R370
RG_PD_CPU
R372
ZER_CRS_EDGE
LS_HP_CPU
D_L_2
8
R373
R374
AD<7..0>
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
+5V
MFSLD
C191
3
SC_INA
Q102
SC_INA*
SC_INB
SC_INB*
S_IN
R101
C101
P73 81
P72 80
P71 79
P75 83
P74 82
P77 85
P76 84
P81 88
P80 87
AVss 86
P70 78
Vref 77
AVcc 76
Vss 65
NMI 64
C103
P50 53
P27 52
STBY/CPY
25 P46
P26 51
REQ*
4
48 P23
49 P24
23 P44
24 P45
45 P20
46 P21
47 P22
1
2
3
Q152
+5V
+5V
C105
M1_LOCK_CPU
E0_DT
SC_I_SEL2
HEAT_OFF
POWER_OFF*
+5V
R269
COMP_CLR
Q157
SB_ON
Q182
R219
+5V
M1_ON*
D202
ACK
2
GND
C104
R299
R218
OUT VCC
CPS_ACK_CPU*
+5V
+5V
C218
REQ*
SC_I_SEL3
43 P17
44 Vss
REQ
C202
P53 56
P52 55
P51 54
26 P47
27 P30
R302
R103
20 P42
21 P43
22 Vss
+5V
Q104
Q105
3
0
41 P15
42 P16
3
R104
C102
P60 58
Vss 57
38 P12
39 P13
40 P14
Q103
X101
18 P40
19 P41
36 P10
37 P11
3
2
2
RES* 63
STBY* 62
PHAI 61
+5V
C192
P62 60
P61 59
LNSLD
PUSLD
RGSLD
1
HEAT_ERR_CPU*
16 P94
17 P95
33 P36
34 P37
35 Vcc
+5V
SC_HP_CPU
RETRY_PD_CPU
R270
Q101
13 P91
14 P92
15 P93
R369
Vcc 68
XTAL 67
EXTAL 66
11 Vss
12 P90
R102
1
P64 70
P63 69
8 PB6
9 PB7
10 RESO*
+5V
S_CLK
6 PB4
7 PB5
31 P34
32 P35
1
R368
MD0 73
P66 72
P65 71
50 P25
2
R105
MD2 75
MD1 74
3 PB1
4 PB2
5 PB3
28 P31
29 P32
30 P33
S_OUT
R106
1
PU_SL
SC_I_SEL1
P83 90
P82 89
1 Vcc
2 PB0
HEAT_PWM
PA0 93
Vss 92
P84 91
NF101
PA2 95
PA1 94
PA7 100
PA6 99
2
3
PA5 98
PA4 97
PA3 96
1
5V
DIGIT<4..0>
C162
DV_AC_ON*
D201
+5V
DV_DC_ON*
PR_DC_ON*
CPS_REQ*
R301
TXD
Q149
SEG<7..0>
8
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
KEY<7..0>
C193
+5V
+5V
+5V
R300
R211
RXD
D203
Q183
R210
C157
D200
ADF type only
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-7
DC Controller Circuit DIagram (2/8)
+5V
+5V
R115
SC_I_SEL3
R277
Q165
R114
R117
SC_I_SEL1
Q112
SC_I_SEL2
3
R113
2
R112
R267
Q109
OUTB
INB
18
INB*
17
GB
16
REFB
15
TdB
14
VSB
13
OUTB*
12
RSB
11
RSA
10
OUTA
9
VSA
8
INA
7
INA*
6
GA
5
REFA
4
TdA
3
1
+24VU
2
OUTA*
Q155 1
R399
SC_COM
SC_B
SC_B*
SC_A
SC_A*
+5V
R227
R226
R225
R224
C263
C264
C265
C266
C107
C106
C166 C165 C164 C163
SC_INB*
SC_INB
SC_INA*
SC_INA
+5V
+5V
R111
R109
R107
C109
A-8
R108
C108
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
DC Controller Circuit Diagram (3/8)
VR103
1
3
R121
2
C155
+24VR
R265
+5V
+24VR
C111
2
+
1
R266
AE
R120
6
AEREF
5
4 Q106
3
3
8
1
2
+
4 Q106
7
R206
AE_DATA
C185
ZD101
+5V
2
VR102
-
8
1
R119
C184
R264
R118
C186
R263
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-9
DC Controller Circuit Diagram (4/8)
KEY<7..0>
8
8
0
R134
0
KR0
1
R133
1
KR1
2
2
R132
2
KR2
3
3
R131
3
KR3
4
R130
4
KR4
5
R129
5
KR5
6
R128
6
KR6
3
7
R127
7
KR7
5
1
D102
1
D113
1
D218
1
D109
1
D108
1
D106
2
7
5
R229
2
HEAT1
2
SERVICE
2
SFPD
2
DPD
2
CDP
1
D115
2
DIG0
[CPM0]
2
DIG1
[CPM1]
1
D114
2
[SIZE1]
1
D103
1
D190
[VOL1]
D214
KR6
DIGIT<4..0>
HEAT0
C169
C170
R230
R231
C171
R232
C172
C173
R233
R234
C174
C175
R235
C168
R228
KR6
2
10CPM 12/13CPM
D114
+5V
R236
0
KR2
Q121
R138
DIG0
[SIZE0]
KR5
+5V
2
DIG3
DIG0
AB/inch
inch
120V
220/240V
D103
D190
R239
1
Q124
R137
DIG1
+5V
2
Q123
R136
DIG4
KR3
R238
D214
DIG2
+5V
R237
3
Q122
R135
DIG3
+5V
R362
4
Q202
R360
DIG4
SEG<7..0>
8
0
3
2
SEG0*
Q113
R240
1
1
3
2
R243
R242
R241
R358
SEG1*
Q114
1
2
3
2
SEG2*
Q115
1
3
3
2
SEG3*
Q116
1
4
3
2
SEG4*
Q117
1
5
3
2
SEG5*
Q118
1
6
3
7
3
2
SEG6*
Q119
1
2
SEG7*
Q120
1
A-10
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
DC Controller Circuit Diagram (5/8)
+5V
2
2
1
3
1
3
Q125
VR104
1
RGAD_VR
2
VR106
LS_VR
2
1 CP23
1
3
1
E0_BUCK
3
R278
+24VU
Q126
2
+5V
D118
R294
R292
1 CPGND1
R140
R145
+5V
+2
E0_DT
JP101
R279
R139
BL_VR
VR107
OP_VR
2
1
2
1
VR105
3
3
1
C123
+5V
R293
JP102
R271
R382
ZER_CRS_LEVEL
+5V
+5V
ZER_CRS
1
R150
D183
2
C181
R149
3
-
8
+
4 Q107
1
R154
2
3
C126
IN B
VDD
R158
5
ZER_CRS_EDGE
C167
IN A
VSS OUT X
R144
+5V
Q153
+5V
SW101
(AB/inch type only)
2
4
3
R275
Q131
4
D_L_2
3
2
1
D_L_1
1
C183
R143
R148
+5V
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-11
DC Controller Circuit Diagram (6/8)
+24VU
1
+5V
3
2
1 Q145
3
2
1 Q144
PUSLD*
1
PUSLD
R162
2
D127
R161
3
2
1 Q143
RGSLD*
1
RGSLD
2
D126
MFSLD
R166
3
2
D125
2
0
R173
1
R174
TH2
2
R175
AE_DATA
1 Q142
3
R176
DSVR
4
R177
OP_VR
5
R207
LS_VR
6
R178
RGAD_VR
7
R179
BL_VR
8
FM1D*
R352
C134 C135 C154 C136 C137 C138 C139 C133
1
Q200
TH1
MFSLD*
AD<7..0>
FM1D
R361
R181
M_TH
LNSLD*
1
LNSLD
2
D124
R165
2
D211
CPUSD
R353
CPUSD*
Q201
+5V
SB_ON
R160
3
SB_LP*
2
1 Q133
R163
R250
+5V
M1_ON*
R246
R245
R244
CPS_ACK_CPU*
R182
ACK*
M1_LOCK_CPU*
R183
MLOCK
HEAT_ERR_CPU*
R172
HEAT_ERR*
LS_HP_CPU
R171
LHP
1
3
Q137
2
C127
MMD
C132
C141
C140
R164
SC_HP_CPU
R169
SCHP
RETRY_PD_CPU
R356
PDP
R170
RPD
C250
CPS_REQ*
3
PR_DC_ON*
3
3
3
3
RG_PD_CPU
C128
R249
Q135
DV_AC_ON
Q138
STBY/CPY*
2
1
A-12
DV_DC_ON
2
1
STBY/CPY
PR_DC_ON
Q136
2
1
DV_AC_ON*
Q134
2
1
DV_DC_ON*
CPS_REQ
2
1
C129
Q140
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
DC Controller Circuit Diagram (7/8)
+5V
+5V
+5V
R196
POWER_OFF*
R189
RLOFF*
D184
6
HEAT_ERR*
3
Q146
2
5
1
–
8
+
4
C143
7
Q107
+5V
COMP_CLR
Q158
R188
+2
R193
2
C142
1
R191
1
D128
R192
D185
+5V
+5V
M_TH
3
2
+5V
+
8
–
4
C176
1
1
3
Q147
Q108
R186
2
Q148
1
HEAT_TRG
R190
+5V
Q151
R212
R214
C160
Q160
R187
3
2
HEAT_OFF
C161
2
1
D132
HEAT_PWM
+5V
5
6
+
8
–
4
2
1
D133
7
Q108
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-13
DC Controller Circuit Diagram (8/8)
+24VR
+24VU
+5V
+5V
+5V
1
J101
2
J101
HEAT0
J102
3
DIG1
J102
4
HEAT1
J102
5
J102
C261
6
C253
R197
R388
7
R364
8
DPD
9
C146
C151
C145
C149
C152
R216
R389
R367
SFPD
J113
2
J113
3
J105
6
J105
1
LNSLD*
PUSLD*
C150
C147 C201
C148
MFSLD*
C268
LHP
J102
+24VU
J102
1
J102
2
J130
J130
C255
REQ
ACK
TXD
RXD
TH2
J113
1
2
J131
J131
1
J114
2
J114
3
J114
1
J109
2
J109
3
J109
4
J109
5
J109
6
J109
7
J109
8
J109
9
J109
10
J109
11
J109
SC_COM
1
SC_B*
J110
2
SC_B
J110
3
J110
4
SC_A*
J110
5
SC_A
J110
6
J110
J102
C254
1
J105
5
+5V
FM1D*
DIG2
J105
4
+2
2
3
1
RGSLD*
1
DIG1
J102
+2
1
1
TH1
+2
J101
1
3
DIG3
J105
count1
count2
+24VU
+2
R385
1
R200
SCHP
C260
J105
2
+5V
R363
C259
1
4
J114
5
J114
6
J114
7
DIG0
1
J114
J111
8
DIG1
2
J114
DIG2
J111
3
DIG3
J111
4
SEG0*
J111
5
J111
ADF type only
SEG1*
6
J103
SEG2*
J111
2
7
J103
3
SEG3*
J111
DV_DC_ON
8
4
SEG4*
J111
PR_DC_ON
J103
9
5
SEG5*
J111
CPS_REQ
J103
10
J103
6
SEG6*
J111
MMD
11
7
SEG7*
J111
ACK*
J103
12
J111
RLOFF*
J103
8
STBY/CPY*
1
DV_AC_ON
CDP
1
DIG3
J108
2
RPD
J108
3
J108
+5V
J103
C267
4
J108
5
J108
+24VR
4
AE
J107
3
AEREF
J107
2
J107
1
J107
C203 C205 C204 C210 C209 C208 C207 C206
MLOCK
1
HEAT_TRG
J104
2
ZER_CRS
J104
3
S_CLK
J104
4
KR0
13
J104
5
KR1
J111
S_OUT
14
6
PWOFF
J111
S_IN
J104
15
J104
J111
16
J111
17
J111
DSVR
18
DIG4
J111
19
J111
PWOFF
7
DIG2
J104
JP103
SERVICE
FB101
CPUSD*
1
SB_LP*
1
+24VU
2
JP104
J132
C258
J106
C257
C262
+5V
J106
C256
C251
+24VU
FB102
2
J132
1
C252
1
+5V
R365
PDP
A-14
+5V
R351
R386
3
J132
4
J132
5
J132
1
TP102
TP103
TP101
KR5
1
DIG2
J201
2
KR4
J201
3
DIG3
J201
4
KR6
J201
5
KR7
J201
6
J201
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
E.
ADF CONTROLLER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
ADF Controller Circuit Diagram (1/3)
+5V
Q3
1
Ct
RESET*
2
RESET
Vs
3
Vref
Ck
4
GND
Vcc
WD
8
7
6
5
C5
+5V
8
RESET*
PSW
DIGIT3
DIGIT2
DIGIT1
DIGIT0
DIPSW1
DIPSW0
C3
+
D1
R2
C4
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
16
Q1
X1
R3
C6
R4
C7
JP1
R5
+5V
R6
A
A*
B
B*
ACK
XTAL
EXTAL
MD1
MD0
NMI*
Vcc
STBY*
Vss
P40/TMCI0
P41/TMO0
P42/TMRI0
P43/TMCI1
P44/TMO1
P45/TMRI1
P46/PHI
P47/E
Q2
P10/A0
P11/A1
P12/A2
P13/A3
P14/A4
P15/A5
P16/A6
P17/A7
Vss
P20/A8
P21/A9
P22/A10
P23/A11
P24/A12
P25/A13
P26/A14
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
NC
28
NC
29
30
31
32
P50/TXDO
P51/RXDO
P52/SCK0
P53/TXD1
P54/RXD1
P55/SCK1
P70/IS*
P71/OS*
P72/BUSY*
P73/IOS*
P74/AS*
P75/WR*
P76/RD
P77/WAIT*
Vcc
P27/A15
REQ
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
NC
14
15
NC
16
C9
RES*
P66/IRQ2*
P65/IRQ1*
P64/IRQ0*
P63/FTI
P62/FTOB
P61/FTOA
P60/FTCI
P37/D7
P36/D6
P35/D5
P34/D4
P33/D3
P32/D2
P31/D1
P30/D0
+5V
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
+5V
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A15
15
12
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
A12
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
D0
D1
D2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
VPP
A12
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
O1
O2
O3
GND
VCC
A14
A13
A8
A9
A11
OE*
A10
CE*
O8
O7
O6
O5
O4
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
A14
A13
A8
A9
A11
14
13
8
9
11
10
A10
A15
15
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
7
6
5
4
3
RD*
+
C1
+5V
R45
J6
J6
4
1
C2
Q11
HC14
ADFC
VCC
GND
14
7
C10
Q6
+
CB1
J1
C22
+5V
CP1
+24V ZD1
J1
C8
+5V
1
J1
+5V
2
J1
R1
3
R44
TXD
RXD
DM0
DM1
WD
LED
ADFC
PDP3
PDP2
PDP1
+5V
C21
2
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-15
ADF Controller Circuit Diagram (2/3)
TP1
4
B*
TP1
1
A
TP1
+24V
1
TP1
3
B
NC
TP1
5
TP1
Q4
MB
2
MA
5
MA*
3
MB*
4
J3
J3
DM0
J3
6
TP1
J3
J3
DM1
+5V
7
VCC NC
1
3
IN1
OUT1
2
5
IN2
OUT2
R10
+5V
R8
C13
+24V
R9
R14
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
OUTA*
VrefA
INA*
VSA
RSA
OUTB*
TdB
GND
INB
TdA
GND
INA
OUTA
RSB
VSS
VrefB
INB*
OUTB
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
OUTA
OUTA*
7
6
J3
J3
GND
4
10
R12
+24V
TP1
7
6
2
A*
Q5
C11
+24V
C14
+5V
R16
R15
1
+5V
J7
R11
Q8
LED
2
J7
C12
R13
A-16
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
ADF Controller Circuit Diagram (3/3)
+5V
+5V
R19
R41
PDP3
9
C16
+5V
8
R20
7
J5
D2
HC14
REQ
2
J5
R30
C19
+5V
J5
Q9
6
+5V
8
6
5
R22
4
5
J5
D3
+5V
J5
HC14
RXD
4
R35
3
R34
4
C20
Q6
+5V
J5
3
R36
Q10
TP1
R23
3
C18
2
TXD
9
+5V
2
R24
1
J5
1
J5
+5V
J5
R37
+5V
DIPSW1
DIPSW0
2
1
R25
R26
R27
R28
3
4
HC14
6
Q6
HC14
SW1
8
R39
Q6
HC14
SW3
10
DIGIT2
Q6
HC14
DIGIT3
12
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
J2
ACK
J2
J2
TXD
J2
J2
RXD
J2
5
9
11
13
Q6
SW2
5
J2
L1
PSW
DIGIT1
REQ
R38
+5V
DIGIT0
J2
R33
+5V
R43
7
R32
R21
C17
PDP1
8
ACK
TP1
R42
R31
1
Q6
+5V
PDP2
R29
1
2
4
8
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-17
A-18
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
F.
COMPOSITE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A502] (1/8)
J201
AC_H
1
AC_H_AF
<A503>
RL601
AC_INPUT
D603
<A503>
AC_N_AF
2
R606
R607
Q607
+5V
R623
AC_N
D602
R601
FIX_HT_H
D604
+
C603
D601
C602
+
Q605
3
2
Q614
2
D606
IN OUT
GND
+5V
3
J207
1
+
1
T600
1
4
2
<A504>
VIN_1SR139
C609
C613
R600
FIX_HT_N
C601
<A508>
5V_ON*
R616
R620
<A508>
ZER_CRS
+5V
D605
R621
Q615
Q616
R622
Q617
R801
C605
<A508>
AC_MONITOR
+
C818
L600
D810
RLOFF*
<A508>
AC1
<A509>
+5V
Q608
C620
R609
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
D620
Q621
R611
Q620
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
R603
2
R613
HEAT_TRG
<A508>
R612
R610
Q611
R614
3
R615
1
SQ600
+5V
R602
C604
A-19
Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A503] (2/8)
<A502>
AC_H_AF
TH102
Q105
+
C101
C151
C157
FU102
FB104
R644
TH101
D543
C102
C156
L103
To radiator plate
+5V
AC_N_AF
<A502>
T101
+5V
+
MPWM
<A508>
<A509>
AC_HA
6
14
LOW_GU <A504>
7
13
12
LOW_G <A504>
24VON <A504>
D542
R104
C588
R116
16
15
24VOFF <A504>
3
Q113
R105
D111
R106
MPWM_INV
<A504>
HV_H <A506>
5
R184
11
HV_L <A506>
10
MV_H <A505>
9
MV_L <A505>
1
D106
2
<A509>
AC_LA
<NC=8>
R109
D121
+
D124
3
2
4
Q118
C106
C105
Q104
R111
D110
D123
1
R110
D125
R163
R108
C107
Q101
D122
C138
+
Q103
C104
R103
T103
3
1
4
2
<A508>
A-20
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
R114
T104
PROTECT
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A504] (3/8)
1
J202
2
3
4
5
6
R182
+5V
+5V
L180
1
L181
D103
R118
DC24V_S
<A508>
C116
C115
C141
D180
<A508>
TIM
Si
8
R181
7
+5V
6
V+
5
INV
D132
+
R180
C182
C181
Cd
C184
T101
Q180
Es
3
Ct
4
GND
FB180
+
+
Cs
2
+24VR
C183
+5V
C180
+5V
R119
R129
D117
C137
R124
+24VR
R122
5
+5V
FB101
+5V
D104
16
D129
R158
R154
R157
+
3
2
C132
C118
C152
4
R115
C133
LOW_G
<A503>
7
8
Q117
ZD103
+5V
Q108
D130
8 Q117
+5V
6
ZD101
1
R139
13
ZD102
D118
4
+
R127
R123
C134
O.V.P
<A503>
24VOFF
C135
C136
R121
O.C.P.1
15
24VON
<A503>
D105
FB103
VIN_1SR139
<A502>
Q109
O.C.P.2
CLIMIT
<A508>
+24VU
L101
+24VR
+5V
R131
LOW_GU
<A503>
FB102
C122
14
D109
R132
T105
4
R144
2
8
3
R168
Q110
1
6
7
5
R130
C125
Q116 4
R149
2
R151
R153
3
Q115
C140
C139
Q116
5
C160
8
7
4
Q111
R169
R145
C142
8
1
+
R152
D107
C120
R128
+5V
R141
C153
+5V
R134
C154
R165
C126
R138
R150
R167
6
+
4
C129
D131
C103
C127
+5V
R125
D119
R156
R148
C145
Q107
+24VR
1
D108
R136
MPWM_INV
<A508>
R185
D120
+5V
4
R155
C144
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
R147
Q115
2
8
3
R159
C146
R186
C143
R160
R146
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-21
Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A505] (4/8)
R209
R203
R205
<A503>
MV_H
R202
C201
D202
R206
10
9
MV_L
<A503>
T101
<A508>
PDC_S
C204
C206
R201
C202
JP202
R211
PAC_S
<A508>
PDC_PWM
<A508>
Q201
C207
JP148
R212
C539
C538
+24VR
+
R550
<A508>
PAC_OUT JP140
R591
4
R516
1
3
R549
Q526
R592
T508
5
2
+24VR
A-22
C561
R514
+
C510
3
1
4
2
C513
PRIMARY
J209
R521
C512
C509
+
C611
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A506] (5/8)
J215
J212
DEVELOPING
C210
C212
C214
D211
R225
C211
D210
D209
D208
D207
D206
J213
SEPARATION
R254
C213
T101
12
<A503>
HV_H
R210
C220
T201
R237
HV_L
<A503>
R236
3
1
4
2
R238
C221
+
ACBIAS
<A508>
+5V
11
R207
D214
BIAS_PWM
<A508>
R208
JP201
R239
C218
Q206
C219
C208
R243
BIAS_S
<A508>
D215
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
C215
A-23
Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A507] (6/8)
R361
R327
VR301
D306
T_FEEDBACK
<A508>
C359
C377
R318
+24VR
T302
5
R336
T_FW_DRV
<A508>
J210
Transfer output
1
Q310
D308
6
R338
7
2
R337
R330
R329
7
R328
C318
C312
+
+24VR
D307
Q308
R332
T_FW_ON
<A508>
R390
CLK32K
<A508>
R317
Q325
HV_LIMIT
<A508>
R392
ZD303
Q311
R393
C317
R326
<A508>
T_FW_S
JP301
C346
R351
R352
R353
R354
R355 R356
C345
D326
D325
11
D344
D343
D342
C381
D341
D339
D340
C379
D323
T_REV
C343
HV_L
<A503>
D322
12
<A503>
HV_H
T101
C322
D324
C342
C321
C380
C382
C344
+5V
T_REV_R
R388
T_REV_ON*
<A508>
A-24
C329
D328
Q321
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A508] (7/8)
+24VU
1 PAC_S
2
<A505> PAC_S
+5V
Q901
2
3
PAC_OUT
5V_ON*
+5FBT
3
HV_LIMIT
RESET
PW_OFF*
HV_LIMIT
4 RESET*
JP999 5
MODE1
1
C903
6 MODE2
NC
7 J_CTL
NC
8
<A509> LAMP_ON
NC
9 FL_LIGHT_ON*
VR801
<A509> PWM_1KHz
R802
10 AC_MONI_VR
+5V
11 AC_MONI TOR
<A502> AC_MONITOR
12 AGND
13 FL_S
+5V
IN OUT
NC
+24VR
<A504>
DC24V_S
<A507>
<A506>
T_FEEDBACK
BIAS_S
<A505>
<A504>
PDC_S
CLIMIT
<A503>
<A504>
PROTECT
TIM
<A507>
<A507>
T_REV_ON*
T_FW_DRV
<A507>
T_FW_S
14 P_C_S
15 +24V
16
DATA2
45
DATA3
DATA0
T_FW_ON
ACK*
CLK32K
37
MPWM
PDC_PWM
+24V
ACBIAS
SKGND
TIM
23
T_REV_ON*
24
41
40
XO
BIAS_PWM
21 PROTECT
22
42
XI
MPWM_CLK
19 PDC_S
20 CLIMIT
44
43
39
38
PGND
17 T_FEEDBACK
18 BIAS_S
25
47
46
+5V
DC24V_S
48
DATA1
CPS_REQ*
GND
50
49
S_IN
T_FW_DRV
S_OUT
T_FW_S
S_CLK
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
PAC_OUT
5V_ON*
<A505>
<A502>
PWOFF
CPS_REQ
PR_DC_ON
DV_DC_ON
DV_AC_ON
STBY/CPY*
LAMP_DETECT <A509>
T_FW_ON
ACK*
<A507>
CLK32K
<A507>
J205
4
3
+24VU
GND
2
1
MMD
MLOCK
J203
1
2
3
RLOFF*
ACK*
MMD
4
5
CPS_REQ
PR_DC_ON
6
7
DV_DC_ON
DV_AC_ON
8
STBY/CPY*
<A502>
NC
NC
+5V
MPWM
PDC_PWM
<A503>
<A505>
BIAS_PWM
+24VR
<A506>
ACBIAS
SKGND
<A506>
S_IN
S_OUT
J204
1
2
3
PWOFF
S_IN
S_OUT
4
5
S_CLK
6
7
HEAT_TRG <A502>
MLOCK
ZER_CRS
<A502>
S_CLK
Q900
JP999 : 220 / 240V model only
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-25
Composite Power Supply Circuit Diagram [A509] (8/8)
R027
R018
2
LAMP_ON
<A508>
Q012
D004
R029
3
2
4
1
+
PWM_1KHz
<A508>
ZD001
R063
C002
Q003
R030
D003
D006
Q005
+
R009
R026 R003 VR001 R007 R023
R011
R028
R019
C003
D005
1
R004
+
3
R021
4
R020
R008
C001
R013
R005
R012
R006
HIC001
9
+5V
C004
1
2 J910
3
C008
8
7
6
5
4
3
1
<502>
AC_HA
2
D007
R022
R002
4
1
D002
2
AC_LA
<502>
6
3
SQ001
Q002
Q0001
L001
R025
R016
D010
R001
Q001
3
2
D011
4
1
D009
Q011
LAMP_DETECT
<A508>
D008
+
C005
R012, R013, R018, R021 : 220 / 240V model only
A-26
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
G. CONTROL PANEL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
J301
13
SW301
SW302
SW303
SW304
–
CLR
ZOOM
PRESET COPY RATIO
SW305
SW306
SW307
SW308
a2
KR0
b1
f2
a3
b2
f3
b3
g2
+
J301
14
COPY
AE
CASSETTE/MULTI
c1
KR1
e2
g3
c2
d2
e3
c3
d3
C303
J301
11
12
13
14
15
17
16
18
20
19
D304
2
1
D303
2
1
D302
2
1
D301
2
1
7 SEG DISPLAY
LED315
DIG0
1
DIG2
19
J301
J301
J301
J301
J301
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
10
9
7
6
4
5
8
LED305
LED306
2
2
2
1
b
1
c
LED307
LED308
LED310
LED311
LED312
2
2
2
2
2
1
JAM
DIG4
1
AE
1
ZOOM
1
CASSETTE
1
1
d
e
LED317
LED316
DFJAM
MAIN_JAM
1
MULTI
5
SEG0 R301
6
SEG1 R302
7
SEG2 R303
8
SEG3 R304
9
SEG4 R305
10
SEG5 R306
11
SEG6 R307
12
SEG7 R308
LIFT
2 LED321
1
ME
2 LED320
1
TS
ADF type only
ADF type
only
+5V
C302
J301
J301
18
2
C301
VR301
DSVR
+5V
J301
15
J301
16
SW309
PWOFF
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
17
1
J301
LED304
2
1
3
J301
LED303
2
a
1
J301
1
LED302
DIG3
4
2 LED318
J301
3
2 LED319
J301
DIG1
1
J301
2
2
%
PHOTO
J301
3
1
2
LED301
1
2
J302
J302
2 J303
POWER
1
J303
A-27
APPENDIX
H. AE SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
+24VR
R601
R603
J601-1
C603
R606
C601
+24VR
2
8
1
3
PD601
+
J601-2
R605
4
Q601
R602
+24VR
8
6
Q601 4
+ 5
7
J601-3
R604
C602
J601-4
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-29
APPENDIX
I. SENSOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
+5V
J751-2
Q751
RPD
R751
A-30
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
GND
J751-3
J751-1
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
APPENDIX
J. NOISE FILTER CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
JP502
AC_H
FU501
L501
J501-1
C503
R501
C501
FG
C502
C504
JP501
AC_N
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
J501-2
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-31
APPENDIX
K. HIGH VOLTAGE CONTACT CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1
JP701
1
PR
2
BP701
2
JP702
1
JP703
1
R704
2
SP
BP702
2
JP704
1
JP705
1
DV
2
BP703
2
JP706
1
JP707
1
R701
2
TR
BP704
2
JP708
1
JP709
1
2
2
R702
1
[PR_IN]
BP705
2
JP710
1
JP711
1
[GND_IN]
2
BP706
2
JP712
1
JP713
1
2
2
R703
1
[DV_IN]
BP707
2
JP714
A-32
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
APPENDIX
L. BLANK EXPOSURE (front) CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
LA601
2
1
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
J601
J601
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-33
APPENDIX
M. BLANK EXPOSURE (rear) CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
LA602
2
1
A-34
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
J602
J602
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
APPENDIX
N. SPECIAL TOOLS
You will need the following special tool(s) in addition to the standard tools set when servicing
the machine.
No
1
Tool
Mirror positioning tool (pair for
front and rear)
Tool No.
FY9-3009
2
Wire clip
3
Spring gauge
Shape
Rank*
B
Remarks
For adjusting the distance between the No.1
and No.2 mirrors.
FY9-3017
B
For fixing the scanner
wire in place while adjusting its tension.
CK-0054
B
For checking the cassette spring pressure
Range of measurements: 0 to 1,500g
*Rank:
A: Each service person is expected to carry one.
B: Each five or so service persons is expected to carry one.
C: Each workshop is expected to carry one.
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
A-35
APPENDIX
O. SOLVENTS/OILS
No.
1
Name
Alcohol
Uses
Cleaning: e.g.,
glass, plastic,
rubber parts;
external covers
Composition
Hydrocarbon (fluorine family)
Alcohol
Surface active agent
2
Solvent
3
Lubricating oil
4
Lubricating oil
Cleaning: e.g.,
metal; oil or
toner dirt
Lubricating
spring clutch
Lubricating
drive and
friction parts,
scanner rail
Hydrocarbon
(fluorine/chlorine family)
Alcohol
Mineral oil
(paraffin family)
Silicone oil
A-36
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
Remarks
• Do not bring near
fire.
• Procure locally.
• Isopropyl alcohol
may be substituted.
• Do not bring near
fire.
• Procure locally.
• CK-0451 (100cc)
• CK-0551 (20g)
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
Prepared by
Office Imaging Products Technical Support Division
CANON INC.
Printed in Japan
REVISION 0 (AUG. 1999) (30359/10317)
5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302-8501 Japan
COPYRIGHT © 1999 CANON INC.
CANON PC800s/900s REV.0 AUG. 1999 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
This pubication is printed on
70% reprocessed paper.
PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)
0899AB2.135-1